Instruction manual HRVS-Dn - Esco Drives & Automation
Instruction manual HRVS-Dn - Esco Drives & Automation Instruction manual HRVS-Dn - Esco Drives & Automation
HRVS-DN Medium Voltage Digital Soft Starter 60-1,200A, 2,300-15,000V Instruction and Commissioning Manual Ver.07/01/2009
- Page 3 and 4: 3 • Table of Contents HRVS-DN Ins
- Page 5 and 6: 5 • Table of Contents 8.2.2 PHASE
- Page 7 and 8: 7 • Table of Contents Figure 2- H
- Page 9 and 10: 3. INTRODUCTION 3.1 Why Solcon? Why
- Page 11 and 12: Main Features, Options and Advantag
- Page 13 and 14: 13 • Technical Data 4. TECHNICAL
- Page 15 and 16: 4.3 Typical Connection of the HRVS-
- Page 17 and 18: 17 • Technical Data 4.4 HRVS-DN S
- Page 19 and 20: 19 • Technical Data 4.5 Ordering
- Page 21 and 22: 21 • Technical Data 4.5.2 Orderin
- Page 23 and 24: 23 • Technical Data 4.6 Power Con
- Page 25 and 26: 25 • Technical Data Indication De
- Page 27 and 28: 27 • Technical Data Indication De
- Page 29 and 30: 29 • Technical Data Figure 13 - C
- Page 31 and 32: 31 • Recommended Wiring Diagrams
- Page 33 and 34: 5.5 Soft Start and Soft Stop wiring
- Page 35 and 36: 35 • Recommended Wiring Diagrams
- Page 37 and 38: 5.12 Control Input #7 Notes: • Sw
- Page 39 and 40: 39 • Installation of IP00 (OEM Ki
- Page 41 and 42: 41 • Installation of IP00 (OEM Ki
- Page 43 and 44: 43 • Installation of IP00 (OEM Ki
- Page 45 and 46: 6.7 Remote Key-Pad Installation 45
- Page 47 and 48: 47 • Control Keypad 7. CONTROL KE
- Page 49 and 50: Press the ▲ key. The Test LED wil
- Page 51 and 52: 7.7 Mode Pages Upon initiation of t
<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN<br />
Medium Voltage Digital Soft Starter<br />
60-1,200A, 2,300-15,000V<br />
<strong>Instruction</strong> and Commissioning Manual<br />
Ver.07/01/2009
3 • Table of Contents<br />
<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN <strong>Instruction</strong> and Commissioning Manual<br />
Table of Contents<br />
1. List of Figures...........................................................................................................................6<br />
2. Safety & Warnings....................................................................................................................8<br />
2.1 Safety..........................................................................................................................................8<br />
2.2 Attention......................................................................................................................................8<br />
2.3 Warnings.....................................................................................................................................8<br />
3. Introduction...............................................................................................................................9<br />
3.1 Why Solcon? Why Soft Starters?................................................................................................9<br />
3.2 How Soft Starters Work? ..........................................................................................................10<br />
Main Features, Options and Advantages ........................................................................................11<br />
4. Technical Data ........................................................................................................................13<br />
4.1 <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN IP00 Unit (OEM Kit).................................................................................................13<br />
4.2 Typical Connection of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN IP00 Unit (OEM Kit) .......................................................14<br />
4.3 Typical Connection of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN in a Cabinet....................................................................15<br />
4.3.1 Typical Connection of <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV ...............................................................15<br />
4.3.2 Typical Connection of <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN from 10kV and up. ....................................................16<br />
4.4 <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Selection..................................................................................................................17<br />
4.4.1 Motor Current and Starting Conditions..........................................................................17<br />
4.4.2 PIV (Peak Inverse Voltage)...........................................................................................17<br />
4.4.3 Rated Currents Frame Sizes.........................................................................................18<br />
4.5 Ordering Information.................................................................................................................19<br />
4.5.1 Ordering IP00 Unit (OEM kit) ........................................................................................19<br />
4.5.2 Ordering a Cabinet Installed Soft Starter ......................................................................21<br />
4.6 Power Connections Description................................................................................................23<br />
4.7 Control Connections Description ..............................................................................................24<br />
4.7.1 Input Terminal 7 - Test/Reset/MULTI SOFT STOP.......................................................30<br />
4.7.2 Input Terminal 8 - Dual Adjust/Reset ............................................................................30<br />
4.7.3 Output Terminals 10, 11 & 12 – Immediate/# Strts PreAlarm .......................................30<br />
5. Recommended Wiring Diagrams ..........................................................................................31<br />
5.1 Control Supply and Control Inputs From a Single Source ........................................................31<br />
5.2 Separate Sources for Control Supply and Control Inputs .........................................................31<br />
5.3 Three Separate Sources for Control Supply and Control Inputs...............................................32<br />
5.4 Soft Start and Immediate Stop (No Soft Stop)..........................................................................32<br />
5.5 Soft Start and Soft Stop wiring..................................................................................................33<br />
5.6 Soft Start, Soft Stop and Immediate Stop Wiring......................................................................33<br />
5.7 Soft Start, Soft Stop and Stop...................................................................................................34<br />
5.8 External Fault............................................................................................................................34<br />
5.9 Dual Adjustment (Control Input #8)...........................................................................................34<br />
5.10 Bypass Contactor......................................................................................................................35<br />
5.11 Operating via Communication Links .........................................................................................36<br />
5.12 Control Input #7 ........................................................................................................................37<br />
5.13 Control Input #8 ........................................................................................................................37<br />
6. Installation of IP00 (OEM Kit) in a Cabinet ...........................................................................38<br />
6.1 Mounting ...................................................................................................................................38<br />
6.1.1 Low Voltage Section......................................................................................................39<br />
6.2 Temperature Range & Heat Dissipation ...................................................................................39<br />
6.3 Control Module Main PCB and Optional PCBs.........................................................................40<br />
6.4 Dip Switch Settings on the Main PCB.......................................................................................40<br />
6.4.1 Switch # 1 – Display Modes ..........................................................................................40<br />
______________________________________________________________________________________
4 • Table of Contents<br />
6.4.2 Switch # 2 – Tacho Feedback (0-10VDC).....................................................................41<br />
6.4.3 Switches # 5, 6 – Language Selection ..........................................................................41<br />
6.4.4 Switch # 7 – Extended Settings.....................................................................................42<br />
6.4.5 Switch # 8 – Software Lock...........................................................................................42<br />
6.5 Analog I/O (Option 5) (Terminals Gnd, Out (-), Out (+)) ..........................................................43<br />
6.6 Insulation test (Option 4) (Terminals 25, 26, 27 and Leak).....................................................44<br />
6.7 Remote Key-Pad Installation ....................................................................................................45<br />
7. Control Keypad .......................................................................................................................47<br />
7.1 LCD Arrangement.....................................................................................................................47<br />
7.2 Push-Buttons ............................................................................................................................47<br />
7.3 Status LEDs..............................................................................................................................48<br />
7.4 Reviewing and Modifying Parameters ......................................................................................48<br />
7.5 Upon first Control Voltage Connection......................................................................................48<br />
7.6 Special Actions Performed in TEST/MAINTENANCE Mode ....................................................48<br />
7.6.1 Run Self Test.................................................................................................................48<br />
7.6.2 View Software Version ..................................................................................................49<br />
7.6.3 Obtain Default Parameters............................................................................................49<br />
7.6.4 Reset Statistical Data....................................................................................................49<br />
7.6.5 Calibrate Voltage and Current (Factory Use Only!).......................................................50<br />
7.6.6 Setting Time and Date...................................................................................................50<br />
7.7 Mode Pages..............................................................................................................................51<br />
7.8 Overview of All Mode Pages and Factory Defaults...................................................................52<br />
7.8.1 Display Mode – Page 0 .................................................................................................54<br />
7.8.2 Main & Protect. – Page 1 ..............................................................................................55<br />
7.8.2.1 Tripping Curves of the Integrated Overload Protection ..........................................58<br />
7.8.3 Start Parameters – Page 2............................................................................................60<br />
7.8.3.1 Soft Start Parameters.............................................................................................64<br />
7.8.3.2 Special Control for Synchronous Motors Excitation ...............................................65<br />
7.8.4 Stop Parameters – Page 3............................................................................................66<br />
7.8.4.1 Soft Stop Parameters .............................................................................................67<br />
7.8.5 Dual Adjustment Parameters – Page 4 .........................................................................68<br />
7.8.6 Fault Parameters – Page 6 ...........................................................................................69<br />
7.8.7 I/O Programming Parameters – Page 7 ........................................................................71<br />
7.8.7.1 Terminal 7 and 8 Programming..............................................................................72<br />
7.8.8 Comm. Parameters – Page 8 – With the Modbus Card ................................................73<br />
7.8.9 Comm. Parameters – Page 8 – With the Profibus Card................................................73<br />
7.8.10 Statistical Data – page 9 ...............................................................................................74<br />
8. Motor and Soft Starter Protection .........................................................................................75<br />
8.1 Adjustable Protection Functions ...............................................................................................75<br />
8.1.1 UNDER CURRENT .......................................................................................................75<br />
8.1.2 O/C –SHEAR PIN..........................................................................................................75<br />
8.1.3 OVERLOAD ..................................................................................................................75<br />
8.1.4 UNBALANCE CURRENT..............................................................................................75<br />
8.1.5 GROUND FAULT..........................................................................................................75<br />
8.1.6 UNDER/NO VOLTAGE .................................................................................................76<br />
8.1.7 OVER VOLTAGE ..........................................................................................................76<br />
8.1.8 LONG START TIME......................................................................................................76<br />
8.1.9 OPEN BYPASS.............................................................................................................76<br />
8.1.10 SET CURVE TO 0.........................................................................................................76<br />
8.1.11 PWR ON & NO STRT ...................................................................................................76<br />
8.1.12 MOTOR INSULATION ..................................................................................................76<br />
8.1.13 PHASE SEQUENCE.....................................................................................................76<br />
8.1.14 TOO MANY STARTS....................................................................................................77<br />
8.2 Non Adjustable Protection Functions........................................................................................77<br />
8.2.1 UNDER/OVER FREQUENCY.......................................................................................77<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
5 • Table of Contents<br />
8.2.2 PHASE LOSS................................................................................................................77<br />
8.2.3 WRONG PARAMETERS ..............................................................................................77<br />
8.2.4 STORAGE ERROR.......................................................................................................77<br />
8.2.5 S. SCR OR WR. CON...................................................................................................77<br />
8.2.6 OVER TEMPERATURE ................................................................................................78<br />
8.2.7 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 & EXTERNAL FAULT 2 ............................................................78<br />
8.3 Fault and Reset ........................................................................................................................78<br />
8.4 Auto Reset ................................................................................................................................78<br />
8.5 Timing Occurrence Table..........................................................................................................79<br />
9. Packing, Storage, Handling and Assembly..........................................................................80<br />
9.1 Packing Specification................................................................................................................80<br />
9.2 Storage .....................................................................................................................................80<br />
9.3 Handling....................................................................................................................................80<br />
9.4 Soft starter’s Assembly Procedure:...........................................................................................81<br />
9.4.1 Mechanical Assembly....................................................................................................81<br />
9.4.2 Power and Control Cable Connections .........................................................................82<br />
9.4.3 Power Cables Connection.............................................................................................82<br />
10. Commissioning and Operation Manual ................................................................................83<br />
10.1 Operational notes......................................................................................................................83<br />
10.2 Parts Identification in the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Cabinet............................................................................84<br />
10.2.1 Parts Identification in the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Cabinet (<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV) .........................84<br />
10.2.2 Parts Identification in the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Cabinet (<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN from 10kV and up) ...............86<br />
10.2.3 Low Voltage Compartment............................................................................................88<br />
10.2.4 Fuses.............................................................................................................................89<br />
10.3 Standard Control Diagram ........................................................................................................91<br />
10.3.1 How Does it Operate?...................................................................................................94<br />
11. High-Pot Test of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Cabinet ................................................................................96<br />
11.1 High-Pot Test in <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV, EPT-Tx Connected ...................................................96<br />
11.2 High-Pot Test in <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV, EPT-Tx Not Connected ............................................97<br />
11.3 High-Pot Test in <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN from 10kV and Up, EPT-Tx Connected ........................................99<br />
11.4 High-Pot Test in <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN from 10kV and Up, EPT-Tx Not Connected................................100<br />
12. Test Procedure for Low Voltage Testing............................................................................102<br />
12.1 Accessories Required for LOW VOLTAGE Testing of the Starter and Cabinet......................102<br />
12.2 Notes and Warnings ...............................................................................................................102<br />
12.3 Low Voltage Test Procedure...................................................................................................103<br />
12.3.1 Current Gain Dip Switches Setting..............................................................................106<br />
12.3.2 Test Harness Installation.............................................................................................106<br />
12.3.2.1 Test Harness Installation in <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV .............................................106<br />
12.3.2.2 Test Harness Installation in <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN from 10kV and up ...................................107<br />
13. Start Procedure for Medium voltage Motor........................................................................108<br />
13.1 Special Attention Notes...........................................................................................................108<br />
13.2 Prior to Commissioning in Medium Voltage............................................................................108<br />
13.3 Medium Voltage Test Procedure ............................................................................................109<br />
13.4 Standard Starting Process......................................................................................................110<br />
13.5 Examples of Starting Curves ..................................................................................................111<br />
13.5.1 Light Loads - Pumps, Etc. ...........................................................................................111<br />
13.5.2 High Inertia Loads: Crushers, Centrifuges, Mixers, Etc. .............................................111<br />
13.5.3 Special Starting Using DUAL ADJUSTMENT .............................................................112<br />
13.5.3.1 Special Starting – Using DUAL ADJUSTMENT – Wiring Diagram ......................113<br />
13.5.4 Choosing a Suitable Pump Curve (Centrifugal Pumps) ..............................................113<br />
13.5.4.1 Starting Curve ......................................................................................................113<br />
13.5.4.2 Stopping Curve.....................................................................................................113<br />
13.5.4.3 FINAL TORQUE During Soft-Stopping a Pump Motor.........................................114<br />
______________________________________________________________________________________
6 • Table of Contents<br />
13.6 How to set MPS-3000 and DPM-10 when installed with <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN .......................................114<br />
14. Trouble Shooting ..................................................................................................................116<br />
14.1 In-Out Resistance and Cathode-Cathode Resistance............................................................116<br />
14.2 Rgk (thyristors Gate-Cathode) Resistances. ..........................................................................116<br />
14.3 Firing Test...............................................................................................................................117<br />
14.4 Low Voltage Test Trouble Shooting........................................................................................119<br />
14.5 Medium Voltage Trouble shooting ..........................................................................................123<br />
15. Spare Parts............................................................................................................................126<br />
16. <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (ModBus Protocol) ..................................................................127<br />
16.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................................127<br />
16.2 Basic Structure of the Serial Link Frame ................................................................................128<br />
16.3 SYNC (Silent Interval).............................................................................................................128<br />
16.4 Serial Link No. (Slave Address).............................................................................................128<br />
16.5 Function ..................................................................................................................................128<br />
16.6 List of Functions Supported By The <strong>HRVS</strong>DN........................................................................129<br />
16.7 Actual Data (3X References & 4X references) .......................................................................131<br />
16.8 Parameter Settings (4X References)......................................................................................134<br />
16.9 Control Register Write (4X Reference) ...................................................................................138<br />
16.10 Discrete Commands (Coils, 0x References)......................................................................139<br />
16.11 Discrete Hardwired Inputs (1x References).......................................................................142<br />
16.12 Diagnostics .........................................................................................................................142<br />
16.13 Exception Responses .........................................................................................................143<br />
17. <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (Profibus protocol)..................................................................145<br />
17.1 Global Parameters:.................................................................................................................145<br />
17.2 Operation Mode in PROFIBUS:..............................................................................................145<br />
17.3 Description of the DPV0 (Cyclic) Frame: ................................................................................145<br />
17.3.1 Structure of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Receiving Frame ..............................................................146<br />
17.3.2 Structure of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Transmitting Frame ..........................................................146<br />
17.3.3 Choosing the Receiving DPV0 Registers....................................................................146<br />
17.3.3.1 Selection of the DPV0 Registers by the GSD ......................................................147<br />
17.3.3.2 Selection of the DPV0 Registers through Data Request (DPV1) .........................147<br />
17.3.3.3 Reading of the DPV0 (Cyclic) Registers via Data Request (DPV1) .....................149<br />
17.4 Operations that are Available in DPV1 ...................................................................................150<br />
17.4.1 Read and Write from Random Registers via Data Request........................................150<br />
17.5 Configure the PROFIBUS in the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN............................................................................152<br />
17.6 Watch Dog Definition ..............................................................................................................152<br />
17.7 Numbers of actual data Register for (decimal) .......................................................................153<br />
17.8 Number of Setting Registers for Data Request.......................................................................157<br />
17.8.1 Main & protect. parameters.........................................................................................157<br />
17.9 Start Parameters.....................................................................................................................157<br />
17.10 Stop Parameters.................................................................................................................157<br />
17.11 Dual Adjust Parameters......................................................................................................158<br />
17.12 Fault Parameters ................................................................................................................158<br />
17.13 I/O Programming ................................................................................................................158<br />
17.14 Communication Parameters ...............................................................................................158<br />
17.15 Time Parameters ................................................................................................................159<br />
18. Parameters List.....................................................................................................................160<br />
19. General Information: ............................................................................................................163<br />
1. LIST OF FIGURES<br />
Figure 1- <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Cabinet Type IP31 (NEMA1) ............................................................................................10<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
7 • Table of Contents<br />
Figure 2- <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Chassis Type (IP00) .........................................................................................................10<br />
Figure 3 - Principle Diagram of Digital Medium Voltage Soft Starter (Bypass Preparations not Shown) ..........10<br />
Figure 4 - Phase Control of the Line Voltage Using Semiconductor (SCR) Elements ......................................10<br />
Figure 5 – Voltage Increase ..............................................................................................................................10<br />
Figure 6 – Torque Reduction.............................................................................................................................10<br />
Figure 7 – Current Limit.....................................................................................................................................10<br />
Figure 8 – <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN IP00 Unit (OEM Kit) ........................................................................................................13<br />
Figure 9 – Typical Connection of <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN IP00 Unit (OEM Kit).....................................................................14<br />
Figure 10 – Typical Connection of <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV with Line Contactor and Bypass Contactor ............15<br />
Figure 11 – Typical Connection of <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN from 10kV and up With Line Contactor and Bypass Contactor . 16<br />
Figure 12 – <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV Power Section............................................................................................23<br />
Figure 13 – Control Module Input/Output ..........................................................................................................29<br />
Figure 14 – <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV - Phase Disassembly Accessories.............................................................39<br />
Figure 15 - <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Control Module ..............................................................................................................40<br />
Figure 16 – Optional Analog PCB .....................................................................................................................43<br />
Figure 17 – Optional Insulation PCB Wiring......................................................................................................44<br />
Figure 18 – RU-7, Resistor Unit – Dimensional Drawing ..................................................................................44<br />
Figure 19 - Remote Key Pad, Connection Cable and Control Module. .............................................................45<br />
Figure 20 - Remote Key Pad - Dimensions.......................................................................................................45<br />
Figure 21 - Remote Key Pad - Mechanical Installation and Cut-out Dimensions.............................................46<br />
Figure 22 - <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Control Keypad ..............................................................................................................47<br />
Figure 23 – Eye Bolts Location on Top of the Cabinet......................................................................................80<br />
Figure 24 – Cabinet Lifting Using 4 Lifting Cables. Top angle, A, Should be ≤60° ..........................................81<br />
Figure 25 – Anchor Bolts Holes Location on the Base of the Cabinet at Level 0mm. .......................................81<br />
Figure 26 – Power and Control Cables Penetration to the Cabinet at Level 75mm ..........................................82<br />
Figure 27 – Power Cables Connection and Control Cables Routing.................................................................82<br />
Figure 28 – <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV Standard Cabinet – One Line Diagram......................................................84<br />
Figure 29 - <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV Standard Cabinet – Doors Closed..............................................................85<br />
Figure 30 - <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV Standard Cabinet – Doors Open ................................................................85<br />
Figure 31 – <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN from 10kV and up, Standard Cabinet – One Line Diagram ..........................................86<br />
Figure 32 - <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN from 10kV and up Standard Cabinet – Doors Closed....................................................87<br />
Figure 33 - <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN from 10kV and up Standard Cabinet – Doors Open ......................................................87<br />
Figure 34 - <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Low Voltage Compartment ............................................................................................88<br />
Figure 35 – Power Supply to Firing PCB (<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Models up to 6600V). .....................................................89<br />
Figure 36 – Power Supply to Firing PCB (<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Models From 10000V and up)........................................90<br />
Figure 37 – EPT-Rx Fuse Replacement Procedure ..........................................................................................90<br />
Figure 38 - <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN - Typical Control Wiring of Standard Cabinet ...............................................................91<br />
Figure 39 – <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV – Preparations for High-pot Test................................................................96<br />
Figure 40 – <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV – EPT-Tx not Connected Preparations for High-pot Test, Testing L1 .......97<br />
Figure 41 – <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV – EPT-Tx not Connected Preparations for High-pot Test, Testing L2 .......98<br />
Figure 42 – <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV – EPT-Tx not Connected Preparations for High-pot Test, Testing L3 .......98<br />
Figure 43 – <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN from 10kV and Up – Preparations for High-pot Test.....................................................99<br />
Figure 44 – <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN from 10kV and up, EPT-Tx not Connected, Preparations for High-pot Test, Testing L1<br />
.................................................................................................................................................................100<br />
Figure 45 – <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN from 10kV and up, EPT-Tx not Connected, Preparations for High-pot Test, Testing L2<br />
.................................................................................................................................................................101<br />
Figure 46 – <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN from 10kV and up, EPT-Tx not Connected, Preparations for High-pot Test, Testing L3<br />
.................................................................................................................................................................101<br />
Figure 47 – Current Gain Dip Switches Location ............................................................................................106<br />
Figure 48 – <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV – EPT-Tx and Test Harness ....................................................................107<br />
Figure 49 – <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN From 10kV and up – EPT-Tx and Test Harness.........................................................107<br />
Figure 50 – Firing PCB – SCR#1 Gate-Cathode Testing ................................................................................116<br />
Figure 51 – DPV0 parameters (Cyclic parameters).........................................................................................146<br />
Figure 52 – Updating the register number that will show at DPV0 (by Data Request).................................... 148<br />
Figure 53 – Reading the register number that is shown in the DPV0 (cyclic) list ............................................149<br />
Figure 54 – Choosing register number 80 hex ................................................................................................150<br />
Figure 55 – Reading 4 following register by Data Request (DPV1) ................................................................151<br />
______________________________________________________________________________________
8 • Safety & Warnings<br />
2. SAFETY & WARNINGS<br />
2.1 Safety<br />
1<br />
2<br />
3<br />
4<br />
5<br />
Read this <strong>manual</strong> carefully before operating the equipment and follow its<br />
instructions.<br />
Installation, operation and maintenance should be in strict accordance<br />
with this <strong>manual</strong>, national codes and good practice.<br />
Installation or operation not performed in strict accordance with these<br />
instructions will void manufacturer’s warranty.<br />
Disconnect all power inputs before servicing the soft starter and/or the<br />
motor.<br />
After installation, check and verify that no parts (bolts, washers, etc.)<br />
have fallen into the Power Section (IP00) of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN.<br />
2.2 Attention<br />
This product was designed for compliance with IEC 60947-4-2 for class A<br />
1<br />
equipment and EN 50178.<br />
2 For further information, see the Technical Specifications.<br />
2.3 Warnings<br />
1<br />
2<br />
3<br />
4<br />
Internal components and PCBs are at mains potential when the <strong>HRVS</strong>-<br />
DN is connected to mains. This voltage is extremely dangerous and<br />
contact with it will cause death or severe injury.<br />
When the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN is connected to mains full voltage may appear on<br />
the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN’s output terminals and motor’s terminals, even if control<br />
voltage is disconnected and motor is stopped.<br />
The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN must be grounded to ensure correct operation, safety and<br />
to prevent damage.<br />
Check that power factor capacitors are not connected to the output side<br />
of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN (U, V, W).<br />
Also make sure that power factor capacitors are not connected to the<br />
bypass preparation bus bars (L1B, L2B, L3B when exist)<br />
The company reserves the right to make any improvements or modifications to its products without<br />
prior notice.<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
3. INTRODUCTION<br />
3.1 Why Solcon? Why Soft Starters?<br />
9 • Introduction<br />
Three-phase AC induction motors are commonly used in a wide variety of drive applications. Due to their<br />
starting characteristics, in many cases these motors cannot be connected directly to the power supply system.<br />
When starting Direct On Line (DOL) the motor can see a very high surge current reaching up to 6 times (and<br />
more…) the rated motor current. This excessive current puts stress on the supply system and the switchgear.<br />
Also, when starting DOL, a very high peak torque can occur, stressing the driven motor and the mechanical<br />
system including auxiliary power transmission parts (V-belt, gears, etc.).<br />
There are several methods for reducing the damaging effects of this excessive starting current. Conventional<br />
methods include reactors and autotransformers. But these methods only allow the voltage to be reduced in<br />
steps whereas a soft starter provides step-free acceleration of the drive system by continuously increasing the<br />
voltage over a selected period of time. This approach to starting minimizes the effect of high inrush current on<br />
the supply system, the motor and the driven load.<br />
Soft starters provide the following benefits:<br />
• Reduced starting current, eliminates voltage drops and dips of the supply network<br />
• Smoother acceleration of loads, eliminates process or product damage<br />
• Extended lifetime of all mechanical components, e.g. eliminates gearbox damage and results in less<br />
maintenance & downtime<br />
• Extended motor life<br />
• Reduced maintenance and operating costs<br />
The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN soft starter represents a logical extension of the Solcon soft starter product range into medium<br />
voltage applications.<br />
With <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN, Solcon presents an innovative standard product that provides a flexible, low cost alternative<br />
to fixed speed (DOL) starting.<br />
Designed for use with standard medium voltage three-phase squirrel cage induction motors as well as<br />
synchronous motors, this high-performance digital soft starter ensures smooth acceleration and deceleration.<br />
<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN is available in all standard internationally recognized medium voltage ratings: 2.3kV, 3.3kV, 4.16kV,<br />
6kV and 6.6kV, 10kV, 11kV, 13.2kV, 13.8kV and 15kV.<br />
The standard current output range capability is from 200kW to 27MW.<br />
<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN is designed and built to meet international standards including:<br />
• IEC • EN • DIN VDE • NEMA • UL/CUL • IEEE<br />
The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN soft starters are manufactured at the highest quality level. The entire design, production and<br />
delivery process, (i.e. construction, manufacturing, order processing and logistics delivery center) have been<br />
certified DIN ISO 9001.2000.<br />
The enclosed versions of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN are provided as ready-to-connect cabinet enclosed type units<br />
(example shown in Figure 1) or - for OEM only - chassis type OEM kits (example shown in Figure 2) are<br />
available for building into custom enclosures or other relevant equipment (note: the complete interface<br />
engineering is the responsibility of the user).<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
10 • Introduction<br />
Figure 1- <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Cabinet Type IP31 (NEMA1)<br />
3.2 How Soft Starters Work?<br />
Figure 2- <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Chassis Type (IP00)<br />
By using thyristors (SCRs) in a phase angle control mode, reduced voltage control can be achieved. Phase<br />
control makes it possible to gradually increase the motor terminal voltage from an initial set point up to the<br />
system supply voltage level. The related starting current and the starting torque can be optimally adjusted to<br />
the motor/load conditions.<br />
Figure 3 - Principle Diagram of Digital Medium Voltage Soft<br />
Starter (Bypass Preparations not Shown)<br />
Figure 4 - Phase Control of the Line Voltage Using<br />
Semiconductor (SCR) Elements<br />
Figure 5 shows a principal voltage increase curve. Figure 6 demonstrates the torque reduction compared to the<br />
DOL torque. Figure 7 demonstrates typical behavior of motor current.<br />
Figure 5 – Voltage Increase Figure 6 – Torque Reduction Figure 7 – Current Limit<br />
In addition, the Solcon <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN soft starters provide the "soft stopping" function as a standard feature.<br />
Similar to the reduced voltage start, a stop command gradually reduces the motor voltage over time until the<br />
motor stops. Abrupt stopping is avoided, a specific advantage in pumping applications to prevent the<br />
damaging effects of water hammer and on conveyor belts where the load may be damaged by an abrupt stop.<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Main Features, Options and Advantages<br />
Advantages at a Glance<br />
Complete line of 60-1,200A, 2,300-15,000V as<br />
standard products<br />
Customized soft starters (consult the factory<br />
for details)<br />
Heavy duty, fully rated design<br />
Starting capacity of 400% of FLC for 30<br />
seconds at a rated ambient temperature of 50°C<br />
Preparation for bypass - to maintain protection<br />
when bypass is closed<br />
Robust construction<br />
Superior starting & stopping characteristics<br />
Comprehensive motor protection package<br />
User friendly<br />
Unique protection for corrosive environments<br />
Generator ready - auto frequency tracking<br />
Sustains variations of 45-65Hz while starting<br />
Unique built in optional features including:<br />
Motor insulation tester<br />
RS 485 comm. Modbus / Profibus<br />
Analog output<br />
Relay PCB for comm. control<br />
Tacho feedback<br />
Multi-start (standard)and Multi-soft<br />
stop (optional) capability<br />
Synchronous motor excitation system<br />
control<br />
Remote display<br />
Standard Ratings<br />
2.3kV, 4.16kV, 6kV, 6.6kV, 10kV,11kV,<br />
13.2kV, 13.8kV, 15kV<br />
Starting & Stopping<br />
Soft start & soft stop<br />
Current limit<br />
Pump control program<br />
Torque and current control for optimized<br />
starting & stopping process<br />
Dual adjustments - two starting & stopping<br />
characteristics<br />
Advanced pulse start<br />
Linear acceleration<br />
11 • Introduction<br />
Motor & Starter Protection<br />
Too many starts<br />
Long start time (stall)<br />
Shear-pin<br />
Electronic overload with selectable curves<br />
according to IEC classes or NEMA classes<br />
Under current with adjustable delay<br />
Unbalance current with adjustable delay<br />
Ground fault with adjustable delay<br />
Phase loss & phase sequence<br />
Under, over & no voltage<br />
Load loss (motor not connected)<br />
Shorted SCR<br />
Starter over-temperature<br />
Displays LCD & LEDs<br />
Illuminated LCD - 2 lines x 16 characters<br />
Selectable languages: English, German, French<br />
and Spanish (Chinese and Russian - optional)<br />
Two display modes for basic and advanced<br />
applications<br />
Friendly operation with default parameters<br />
Eight LEDs for quick operational status<br />
Statistical data including:<br />
Total run time<br />
Total number of starts<br />
Total number of trips<br />
Last start current<br />
Last start time<br />
Last 10 trips with time stamp<br />
Current at trip<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
12 • Introduction<br />
Unique Built-in Options<br />
Analog output, related to the motor's current,<br />
programmable as 0-10VDC, 4-20mA, 0-20mA or<br />
related to the motor’s rated power<br />
Motor insulation test - a unique feature for<br />
submersible pumps, motors installed in harsh<br />
environments, etc<br />
The system measures motor insulation when<br />
motor is not running.<br />
Two programmable levels are available:<br />
Alarm level, adjustable 0.2-5 Mohm<br />
Start disable level, adjustable 0.2-5Mohm,<br />
preventing starting when insulation is below<br />
acceptable levels<br />
Special tacho feedback circuitry<br />
Modbus RTU - enables setting, control &<br />
supervision<br />
Profibus DP – enables setting, control &<br />
supervision<br />
Relay PCB – enables starting the application<br />
when the soft starter is installed in a cabinet via<br />
communication, and to control the excitation<br />
system of a synchronous motor<br />
Remote display allows the panel builder to<br />
mount the keypad of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN in a remote<br />
location of the Control Module. A standard length<br />
of 1.5m cable length is supplied<br />
Multi-soft stop special software allows to soft<br />
stop motors when a multi-start application is<br />
applied.<br />
Unique External Options<br />
Customized tailor-made design of a cabinet<br />
Advanced motor protection MPS-3000<br />
Digital multi-meter for advanced measurement<br />
capabilities - DPM-10<br />
Motor Insulation Protection – MIP-6 for<br />
advanced tracking of motor insulation level over<br />
more than 20 years<br />
Line and Bypass Contactors/VCBs<br />
Fuses and disconnectors<br />
Capacitors for power factor correction<br />
Auxiliary Relays<br />
Three standard programmable relays (each relay<br />
with one C.O. 8A, 220VAC contacts)<br />
Immediate with adjustable on and off delays<br />
(can be dedicated for too many starts pre-alarm<br />
relay)<br />
End of Acceleration, with adjustable on<br />
delay<br />
Fault, programmable as fault or fault-fail safe<br />
operation.<br />
Low motor insulation alarm (optional relay)<br />
Applications - Industrial<br />
Pumps<br />
Hydraulic systems<br />
Fans and blowers<br />
Compressors<br />
Conveyors<br />
Applications - Marine & Offshore<br />
Water, ballast and fire-fighting pumps<br />
Refrigeration chillers and compressors<br />
Hydraulic pumps and power packs<br />
Thrusters<br />
Main propulsion motors<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
13 • Technical Data<br />
4. TECHNICAL DATA<br />
4.1 <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN IP00 Unit (OEM Kit)<br />
Power Section and<br />
Connection Harness<br />
Control Module<br />
Firing<br />
Transformer<br />
EPT-Tx and EPT-Rx<br />
Figure 8 – <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN IP00 Unit (OEM Kit)<br />
The IP00 unit (OEM kit) is available for building into custom enclosures or other relevant equipment.<br />
It consists of the following (refer to Figure 8 above):<br />
• Power Section consists of the 3 identical phase stacks, firing PCBs, power supplies to the firing PCBs<br />
(in <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN from 10kV and up power supplies to the firing PCBs are separated from the Power<br />
Section), 3 CTs and the connection harness to the low voltage compartment (including copper wires<br />
and fiber optic wires). The Power Section is installed in the medium voltage compartment of the<br />
cabinet.<br />
• Control Module is the “brain” of the soft starter. It consists of the main CPU PCB, fireboard PCB,<br />
power supply, optional PCBs (when ordered) and input/output interface terminals.<br />
The Control Module for <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN is identical for all ratings and suitable for mounting in the L.V.<br />
compartment of the cabinet which should be fully segregated from the M.V. compartment.<br />
Interposing relays should be connected to all <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN auxiliary contacts, three relays must be<br />
incorporated: Immediate, End of Acceleration and Fault.<br />
• Firing Transformer. This transformer is applicable for 115VAC or 230VAC control voltages.<br />
For <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN controlled by DC control voltages - DC power supply is supplied – for details consult the<br />
factory.<br />
The Firing transformer is installed in the low voltage compartment of the cabinet and supplies control<br />
power to the firing PCBs located in the Power Section of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN in the medium voltage<br />
compartment of the cabinet.<br />
• EPT-Tx (transmitter) and EPT-Rx (receiver) are used instead of the traditional voltage transformer to<br />
measure the input voltage.<br />
The EPT-Tx is installed in the medium voltage compartment and is connected to the mains bus bars<br />
downstream from the Line Contactor.<br />
The EPT-Rx is installed in the low voltage compartment of the cabinet.<br />
The EPT-Tx and EPT-Rx are connected by 2 fiber optic wires which are part of the connection<br />
harness.<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
14 • Technical Data<br />
4.2 Typical Connection of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN IP00 Unit (OEM Kit)<br />
Figure 9 – Typical Connection of <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN IP00 Unit (OEM Kit)<br />
Notes:<br />
• Figure 9 shows a typical connection of an <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN IP00 unit (OEM kit) of up to 6.6kV with a control voltage<br />
of 115/230VAC. For connection diagrams for other models consult the factory.<br />
• L1B, L2B, L3B bus bars are only available in <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV.<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
4.3 Typical Connection of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN in a Cabinet<br />
4.3.1 Typical Connection of <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV<br />
15 • Technical Data<br />
The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN must be connected with a Line Contactor and a Bypass Contactor as demonstrated in Figure<br />
10.<br />
Figure 10 – Typical Connection of <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV with Line Contactor and Bypass Contactor<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
16 • Technical Data<br />
4.3.2 Typical Connection of <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN from 10kV and up.<br />
The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN must be connected with a Line Contactor and a Bypass Contactor as demonstrated in Figure<br />
11.<br />
Figure 11 – Typical Connection of <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN from 10kV and up With Line Contactor and Bypass Contactor<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
17 • Technical Data<br />
4.4 <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Selection<br />
The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN should be selected in accordance with the criteria of motor current and starting conditions.<br />
4.4.1 Motor Current and Starting Conditions<br />
Select the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN according to the motor's Full Load Ampere (FLA) - as indicated on its nameplate (even if<br />
the motor will not be fully loaded).<br />
Soft Starter Full Load Current (FLC) must be ≥Motor’s Full Load Ampere (FLA).<br />
The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN is designed to operate under the following maximum conditions:<br />
Ambient<br />
Temperature<br />
[°C]<br />
Max. Starting Current<br />
[A]<br />
Max. Starting<br />
Time at 400%<br />
FLC<br />
[sec]<br />
50 400%xFLC 30<br />
Max. starts per hour: 2 starts per hour at maximum ratings.<br />
4.4.2 PIV (Peak Inverse Voltage)<br />
Thyristors PIV rating, internal circuitry and insulation define the following voltage levels:<br />
2,300V, 3,300V, 4,160V, 6,600V, 10,000V, 11,000V, 13,800V and 15,000V.<br />
Each soft starter is suitable for 50/60Hz.<br />
PIV level is rated at 3 times the rated voltage or higher.<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
18 • Technical Data<br />
4.4.3 Rated Currents Frame Sizes<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
19 • Technical Data<br />
4.5 Ordering Information<br />
4.5.1 Ordering IP00 Unit (OEM kit)<br />
<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN (IP00)<br />
Customer Name:<br />
Internal Order<br />
No:<br />
Solcon cat. No.:<br />
Rev.:<br />
Project Name:<br />
Contact<br />
Person:<br />
Tel:<br />
Fax:<br />
E-mail:<br />
Motor Name Plate:<br />
Application:<br />
Qty:<br />
Delivery:<br />
Order number<br />
<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN<br />
Rated<br />
current<br />
Voltage<br />
Control<br />
voltage<br />
supply<br />
Control Input<br />
supply Options Lexan<br />
3M-Modbus<br />
See below<br />
See below<br />
115VAC<br />
230VAC<br />
110VDC<br />
125VDC<br />
220VDC<br />
24VDC<br />
115VAC<br />
230VAC<br />
110VDC<br />
125VDC<br />
220VDC<br />
3P-Profibus<br />
5-analog Card<br />
D-remote display<br />
RU-Russian characters.<br />
ROC-Chinese characters<br />
Relay-Relay PCB<br />
NLR-Special software for<br />
Multi soft stop applications<br />
S<br />
RU<br />
N<br />
No. Main Components Model - P/N QTY.<br />
1.<br />
2.<br />
3.<br />
4.<br />
5.<br />
6.<br />
7.<br />
8.<br />
9.<br />
10.<br />
11.<br />
MV Soft Starter Specification<br />
No. ITEM Options Specify<br />
1.<br />
2.<br />
Mains Voltage<br />
2300, 3300, 4160, 6000, 6600, 10000,11000 , 13200,<br />
13800,15000<br />
At 2300-4160V: 60,110, 200, 320, 400, 700, 800,1000, 1200<br />
Starter FLC (Amp.) At 6000-15000V: 70,140,250,300,400,500,700,800,1000,<br />
1200<br />
3. Control Supply Voltage 115VAC, 230VAC, 110VDC, 125VDC, 220VDC, 24VDC<br />
4. Control Input Voltage 115VAC, 230VAC, 110VDC, 125VDC, 220VDC, 24VDC/AC<br />
5. Test Voltage 230, 400, 500, 600, 690<br />
6. Control wires type<br />
7. Harness Side Left/Right<br />
8. Relay Card NO / YES<br />
9. Analogue Output NO / YES<br />
10. MODBUS Communication NO / YES<br />
11. PROFIBUS Communication NO / YES<br />
12. Insulation Test Module NO / YES<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
20 • Technical Data<br />
MV Soft Starter Specification<br />
No. ITEM Options Specify<br />
13. Optional loose<br />
Components<br />
YES/NO<br />
13.1 Extended Split Phase<br />
13.2 Motor Protection Relay<br />
(Refer to Relay Ordering<br />
MPS-6 , MPS 3000-P/C<br />
Information Data)<br />
13.3 Digital Panel Meter DPM NO / YES<br />
13.4 Line Contactor 2300-6600V<br />
J.C. model<br />
MVC/SVC/Toshiba model<br />
CV-6HA<br />
13.5 Bypass Contactor 2300-<br />
6600V J.C. model<br />
MVC/SVC/Toshiba model<br />
CV-6HA<br />
NO / YES (Voltage & Current per selected starter rating)<br />
NO / YES (Voltage & Current per selected starter rating)<br />
13.6 Auxiliary Contacts<br />
13.7 Coil Control Voltage ACV:120,240 DCV:125,250<br />
13.8 Line Contactor 7200-<br />
12000V<br />
Toshiba model CV-10HA<br />
13.9 Bypass Contactor 7200-<br />
12000V<br />
Toshiba model CV-10HA<br />
NO / YES (Voltage & Current per selected starter rating)<br />
NO / YES (Voltage & Current per selected starter rating)<br />
13.1 Auxiliary Contacts 4NO+3NC , 6NO+5NC<br />
13.1 ACV:110,115,120,125,220,230,240,380,400,415,440,500<br />
Coil Control Voltage<br />
DCV:24,60,110,124.220<br />
13.1 MIP – Motor Insulation<br />
Protection<br />
NO / YES<br />
14. Packing Sea fright, Air fright, No<br />
15. Labeling<br />
16. <strong>Instruction</strong> Manuals<br />
17. Ex-Factory Delivery<br />
18.<br />
Ship to Box Marking<br />
19. Special Notes<br />
1. 7.<br />
2. 8.<br />
20. Spare Parts<br />
3. 9.<br />
4. 10.<br />
5. 11.<br />
6. 12.<br />
Issued by: Date :<br />
Approved by (Sales Manager) : Date :<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
21 • Technical Data<br />
4.5.2 Ordering a Cabinet Installed Soft Starter<br />
<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN (Cabinet enclosed)<br />
Cabinet Manufacturer: Solcon<br />
Customer Name:<br />
Internal Order<br />
No:<br />
Solcon cat. No.:<br />
Rev.:<br />
Project Name:<br />
Initiator (to be<br />
indicated on<br />
drawings)<br />
Contact Person:<br />
Tel:<br />
Fax:<br />
E-mail:<br />
Motor Name Plate:<br />
Application:<br />
Qty:<br />
Delivery:<br />
Order number<br />
<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN<br />
Rated<br />
current<br />
Voltage<br />
Control<br />
voltage<br />
supply<br />
Control Input<br />
supply Options Lexan<br />
3M-Modbus<br />
See below<br />
See below<br />
115VAC<br />
230VAC<br />
110VDC<br />
125VDC<br />
220VDC<br />
24VDC<br />
115VAC<br />
230VAC<br />
110VDC<br />
125VDC<br />
220VDC<br />
3P-Profibus<br />
5-analog Card<br />
D-remote display<br />
RU-Russian characters.<br />
ROC-Chinese characters<br />
Relay-Relay PCB<br />
NLR-Special software for<br />
Multi soft stop applications<br />
S<br />
RU<br />
N<br />
No. Main Components Model - P/N QTY.<br />
1.<br />
2.<br />
3.<br />
4.<br />
5.<br />
6.<br />
7.<br />
8.<br />
9.<br />
10.<br />
11.<br />
MV Soft Starter Specification<br />
No. ITEM Options Specify<br />
1.<br />
2.<br />
Mains Voltage<br />
2300, 3300, 4160, 6000, 6600, 10000,11000 , 13200,<br />
13800,15000<br />
At 2300-4160V: 60,110, 200, 320, 400, 700, 800,1000, 1200<br />
Starter FLC (Amp.) At 6000-15000V: 70,140,250,300,400,500,700,800,1000,<br />
1200<br />
3. Control Supply Voltage 115VAC, 230VAC, 110VDC, 125VDC, 220VDC, 24VDC<br />
4. Control Input Voltage 115VAC, 230VAC, 110VDC, 125VDC, 220VDC, 24VDC/AC<br />
5. Test Voltage 230, 400, 500, 600, 690<br />
6. Control Wiring Standard - Fig. 1 (see <strong>manual</strong>) / Other-drawings attached<br />
7. Control wires type<br />
8. Relay Card NO / YES<br />
9. Analogue Output NO / YES<br />
10. MODBUS Communication NO / YES<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
22 • Technical Data<br />
MV Soft Starter Specification<br />
No. ITEM Options Specify<br />
11. PROFIBUS Communication NO / YES<br />
12. Insulation Test Module NO / YES<br />
13. Enclosure Class IP31,IP32,IP54,IP65 Keypad - Behind glass Window<br />
14. Motor Insulation Protection<br />
(MIP)<br />
YES/NO<br />
15. Short Circuit Capacity<br />
16. Paint 80µM RAL 7032 Other<br />
17. Incoming Cabinet NO / YES<br />
18. Input Cables Top / Bottom<br />
19. Output Cables Top / Bottom<br />
20. Door Opening Open to the Left / Right<br />
21. Door Locks & Stoppers YES/NO<br />
22. Mains On Load Switch<br />
23. Main Fuse + Fuse Holder<br />
24. Blown fuse indicator (strikerpin)<br />
25. Line Contactor NO / YES<br />
26. Bypass Contactor NO / YES<br />
27. Capacitor Bank Contactor NO / YES<br />
28. Provision for Bank<br />
Connections<br />
NO / YES<br />
29. Motor Protection Relay MPS-6, MPS 3000-P/C<br />
30. Lamp Test System NO / YES<br />
31. Digital Panel Meter NO / DPM-10<br />
32. Space heater NO / YES<br />
33. Cooling Fan NO / YES<br />
34. Special Thick Painting NO / YES<br />
35. Packing Sea fright, Air fright, No<br />
36. Labeling<br />
36.1. Solcon cabinet logo NO / YES<br />
37. <strong>Instruction</strong> Manuals Standard – 2 sets at door pocket<br />
38. Approvals<br />
38.1. Marine Design Review NO / YES<br />
38.2. Requested Date<br />
39. Drawings for Approval<br />
40. Delivery - Chassis<br />
41. Delivery – Final<br />
42. Special Notes<br />
1. 7.<br />
43.<br />
Spare<br />
Parts<br />
2. 8.<br />
3. 9.<br />
4. 10.<br />
5. 11.<br />
6. 12.<br />
44. Packing <strong>Instruction</strong>s<br />
45. Marking<br />
Issued by: Date :<br />
Approved by (Sales Manager) : Date :<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
23 • Technical Data<br />
4.6 Power Connections Description<br />
Refer to Figure 12 below<br />
Indication Description Remarks<br />
L1, L2, L3 Connection to mains voltage up to<br />
15,000V<br />
Thyristor’s PIV rating, internal circuitry and insulation<br />
defines the following voltage levels:<br />
2,300V +10%/ -15% 50/60Hz<br />
4,160V +10% /-15% 50/60Hz<br />
6,000V +10% /-15% 50/60Hz<br />
6,600V +10% /-15% 50/60Hz<br />
10,000V +10% / -15% 50/60Hz<br />
11,000V +10% / -15% 50/60Hz<br />
13,200V +10% / -15% 50/60Hz<br />
13,800V +10% / -15% 50/60Hz<br />
15,000V +10% / -15% 50/60Hz<br />
Each <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN is suitable for one of the above<br />
L1b, L2b, L3b<br />
(models up to<br />
6.6kV only)<br />
Preparation for bypass<br />
connection<br />
levels & for 50/60 Hz.<br />
Bypass preparation is standard in all <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN<br />
models up to 6.6kV.<br />
All <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN models must be operated with a<br />
Bypass Contactor.<br />
Bus bars and Bypass Contactor must be arranged to<br />
maintain current flow through the internal CTs after<br />
end of the acceleration process. Otherwise, current<br />
protection of the soft starter will not function.<br />
U, V, W Connection to motor Note:<br />
Never connect power factor capacitors to soft starter<br />
output.<br />
Power Factor capacitors, if required should be<br />
connected to the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN line side (mains).<br />
G Connection to ground For proper operation and for safety reasons the<br />
<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Power Section must be properly<br />
grounded.<br />
Figure 12 illustrates the Power Section of <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN models up to 6.6kV.<br />
<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN models from 10kV and up have no preparation for bypass (bypass must be performed in the<br />
cabinet), CTs are mounted externally to the Power Section and power supplies to the firing PCBs are mounted<br />
externally to the Power Section.<br />
Figure 12 – <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV Power Section<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
24 • Technical Data<br />
4.7 Control Connections Description<br />
Refer to Figure 13 page 29<br />
Indication Description Remarks<br />
Terminal 1 Control voltage - phase (positive –<br />
for DC control)<br />
The control voltage operates the electronic circuitry<br />
and the auxiliary relay that controls the firing relay<br />
Terminal 3 Control voltage - neutral (return –<br />
for DC control)<br />
The available control voltages are:<br />
115V for 115V +10%/ -15% 50/60Hz<br />
230V for 230V +10%/ -15% 50/60Hz<br />
24VDC for 24VDC +10%/ -15% DC<br />
110VDC for 110V +10%/ -15% DC<br />
125VDC for 110V +10%/ -15% DC<br />
220VDC for 110V +10%/ -15% DC<br />
Note:<br />
It is recommended that terminals 1-3 be<br />
continuously connected to the control voltage.<br />
Terminal 2 Firing control An internal relay connects the control voltage from<br />
terminal 1 to terminal 2 when firing is required<br />
during Soft Start and Soft Stop. Typically external<br />
relay controlled by this terminal connect the firing<br />
transformer which feed the firing system.<br />
Terminal 4<br />
Terminal 5<br />
Terminal 6<br />
Input – STOP command.<br />
• Input from a N.C. contact<br />
• To stop the motor, disconnect<br />
Control Input voltage from<br />
terminal 4 for at least 250mSec.<br />
(no SOFT STOP)<br />
Input – SOFT STOP command.<br />
• Input from a N.C. contact<br />
• To SOFT STOP the motor<br />
disconnect Control Input voltage<br />
from terminal 5 for at least<br />
250mS<br />
Note:<br />
If SOFT STOP is not required,<br />
connect a jumper between<br />
terminals 4 and 5.<br />
Input – START command.<br />
• Input from a N.O. contact.<br />
• To SOFT START the motor,<br />
connect Control Input voltage to<br />
terminal 4 for at least 500mSec.<br />
Notes:<br />
• Motor will start only if STOP<br />
(terminal 4) and SOFT STOP<br />
(terminal 5) terminals are<br />
connected to Control Input<br />
voltage.<br />
• To reset a fault the START<br />
command must be removed.<br />
(except for UNDERCURRENT<br />
protection)<br />
• The soft starter ignores start<br />
within 3 seconds after stop. Wait<br />
at least 3 seconds before<br />
restarting.<br />
• Control Input voltage (STOP, SOFT STOP,<br />
START, terminal inputs 7 and 8) can be the same<br />
as Control Supply (terminals 1, 3) or voltage from<br />
a different source.<br />
• The Control Inputs are opto-coupled and isolated<br />
from the microprocessor circuitry.<br />
Control Input voltages available:<br />
115V for 115V +10%/ -15% 50/60Hz<br />
230V for 230V +10%/ -15% 50/60Hz<br />
110VDC for 110V +10%/ -15% DC<br />
125VDC for 110V +10%/ -15% DC<br />
220VDC for 220V +10%/ -15% DC<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
25 • Technical Data<br />
Indication Description Remarks<br />
Terminal 7 Programmable input –<br />
Refer to section 4.7.1 page 30.<br />
TEST / RESET/MULTI<br />
SOFT STOP*<br />
(MULTI SOFT STOP<br />
applicable when special<br />
software for multi soft stop<br />
is ordered)<br />
Terminal 8 Programmable input –<br />
Refer to section 4.7.2 page 30.<br />
DUAL ADJUSTMENT /<br />
RESET<br />
Terminal 9 Common to terminals 4-8. This terminal is a reference for terminals 4, 5, 6, 7<br />
& 8.<br />
Note:<br />
When Control Supply and Control Input voltage are<br />
from the same source, connect a jumper between<br />
terminals 3 and 9.<br />
Terminal 10 Programmable IMM/<br />
# STRT PREAL (N.O.)<br />
IMM/# STRT PREAL is the immediate/# of starts<br />
pre-alarm output relay.<br />
Terminal 11 Programmable IMM/<br />
# STRT PREAL (N.C.)<br />
• Voltage free 8A, 250VAC, 2000VA max.<br />
• Selection between functions is made from the<br />
Terminal 12<br />
Terminal 13<br />
Terminal 14<br />
Terminal 15<br />
Terminal 16<br />
Terminal 17<br />
Terminal 18<br />
Programmable IMM/<br />
# STRT PREAL (Common)<br />
Programmable Fault<br />
Output relay (N.O.)<br />
Programmable Fault<br />
Output relay (N.C.)<br />
Programmable Fault<br />
Output relay (Common)<br />
Programmable End of<br />
Acceleration (Run) Output relay<br />
(N.O.)<br />
Programmable End of<br />
Acceleration (Run) Output relay<br />
(N.C.)<br />
Programmable End of<br />
Acceleration (Run) Output<br />
relay (Common)<br />
keypad or through the communication.<br />
• Refer to section 7.8.7 page 71 for IMM/ # STRT<br />
PREAL programming.<br />
• Refer to section 4.7.3 page 30 for more details.<br />
Voltage free 8A, 250VAC, 2000VA max. changes<br />
its position upon fault.<br />
The contact is programmable to function as FAULT<br />
or FAULT-FAIL SAFE.<br />
When the FAULT function is selected, the relay is<br />
energized upon fault. The contact returns to its<br />
original position when one of the following occurs:<br />
• The fault has been removed and <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN was<br />
reset<br />
• Disconnection of Control Supply<br />
When the FAULT-FAIL SAFE function is selected,<br />
the relay is energized immediately when the<br />
Control Supply is connected and de-energizes<br />
when one of the following occurs:<br />
• Fault<br />
• Disconnection of Control Supply<br />
Refer to section 7.8.7 page 71 for FAULT RELAY<br />
TYPE programming.<br />
Voltage free 8A, 250VAC, 2000VA max. changes<br />
its position at the end of acceleration, after an<br />
adjustable time delay (Contact Delay), 0 – 120 sec.<br />
The contact returns to its original position on SOFT<br />
STOP or STOP signals, on FAULT condition, or<br />
upon voltage outage.<br />
The End of Acceleration contact (Run) can be used<br />
for:<br />
• Closing a Bypass Contactor. Use an interposing<br />
relay.<br />
• Activating a valve after compressor has reached<br />
full speed<br />
• Loading a conveyor after motor reached full<br />
speed.<br />
Refer to section 7.8.3 page 60 for RUN CONTACT<br />
DLY programming<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
26 • Technical Data<br />
Indication Description Remarks<br />
Terminal 19 External Fault #1 input Input from a N.O. contact that is connected<br />
between terminal 19 and a control input voltage<br />
that is referred to terminal 21.<br />
The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN will trip 2 seconds after the contact<br />
closes.<br />
Terminal 20 External Fault #2 input Same as terminal 19.<br />
Terminal 21 Common to terminals 19<br />
and 20.<br />
This terminal is a reference for terminals 19 and<br />
20.<br />
Note:<br />
When Control Supply and Control Input voltage to<br />
the external faults input are from the same source,<br />
connect a jumper between terminals 3 and 21.<br />
Terminal 22 No connection (optional) • Standard RS485, half duplex with Modbus<br />
Terminal 23 RS-485 communication (-)<br />
(optional)<br />
Terminal 24 RS-485 communication (+)<br />
(optional)<br />
Terminal 25<br />
Terminal 26<br />
Terminal 27<br />
Programmable Insulation Alarm<br />
Output relay (Common) (optional)<br />
Programmable Insulation Alarm<br />
Output relay (N.O.) (optional)<br />
Programmable Insulation<br />
Alarm Output relay (N.C.)<br />
(optional)<br />
protocol, baud rate 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 BPS.<br />
• Twisted shielded pair should be used.<br />
Connect shield to ground on the PLC/Computer<br />
side.<br />
• Terminals 4 & 5 must be wired to Control Supply<br />
for operation in communication mode (refer to<br />
section 5.11 page 36 for wiring diagram).<br />
• Up 32 units can be connected for Modbus RS485<br />
communication. For reliable communication, units<br />
should be installed in the vicinity of 200m<br />
maximum, from the first to the last unit.<br />
• Refer to section 7.8.8 page 73 for programming.<br />
• Refer to the Modbus communication <strong>manual</strong><br />
section 16 page 127.<br />
Voltage free 8A, 250VAC, 2000VA max. is<br />
energized when the motor insulation level<br />
decreases below the Insulation Alarm level.<br />
The relay is de-energized and the alarm will<br />
disappear if one of the following occurs:<br />
• The insulation level returns to normal for more<br />
than 60 seconds<br />
• <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN resets<br />
• Control Supply disconnection<br />
Refer to section 7.8.6 on page 69 for more details<br />
and programming.<br />
Notes:<br />
• Insulation test can be performed only when main<br />
voltage is not connected to the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN,<br />
(upstream isolation device must be opened.)<br />
• For correct operation of Insulation test, it is<br />
important that the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN is properly<br />
grounded and that the Control Module is properly<br />
fastened to the Power Section.<br />
• Insulation test option and analog output option<br />
can not be applied together.<br />
Terminal Ground (optional) Leave this terminal not connected. Ground the<br />
shield of the analog output signal at the recipient<br />
side.<br />
Analog output (0-10VDC or 0-20mA or 4-20mA)<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
27 • Technical Data<br />
Indication Description Remarks<br />
Terminal out(-) Analog output (-) (optional) reflects motor current and is related to 2xFLA. i.e.,<br />
Full scale (10VDC or 20mA) is related to 2xFLA.<br />
Or<br />
reflects motor power and is related to Pn i.e., Full<br />
scale (10VDC or 20mA) is related to motor rated<br />
power. Motor rated power is set in the MAIN &<br />
PROTECT parameter. Refer to section 7.8.2 page<br />
55.<br />
Terminal out(+) Analog output (+) (optional) • Refer to section 6.5 page 43 for analog output dip<br />
switch setting.<br />
• Refer to section 7.8.7 page 71 for analog output<br />
programming.<br />
Terminal 31<br />
Terminal 32<br />
Terminal 33<br />
Start command output relay (N.O.)<br />
(optional)<br />
Start command output relay (N.O.)<br />
(optional)<br />
Up to Speed Output relay<br />
(N.O.) (optional)<br />
Voltage free 8A, 250VAC, 2000VA max. closes<br />
upon start command via communication. (Modbus<br />
or Profibus)<br />
The contact opens on SOFT STOP or STOP<br />
commands via communication (Modbus or<br />
Profibus).<br />
This contact is used to control the cabinet via the<br />
communication (i.e. closing the Line Contactor).<br />
Voltage free 8A, 250VAC, 2000VA max. changes<br />
its position at the end of acceleration, after current<br />
is reduced below a programmable current and a<br />
time delay.<br />
The Up to Speed relay remains latched until the<br />
motor stops.<br />
Terminal 34 Up to Speed Output relay (N.C.)<br />
(optional)<br />
The Up to Speed relay is used to control the<br />
excitation system of a synchronous motor.<br />
Terminal 35 Up to Speed Output relay<br />
(Common) (optional)<br />
Refer to section 7.8.3 page 60 for RUN CONTACT<br />
DLY programming<br />
D-9 connector Profibus communication (optional) • Profibus DPV0 and DPV1, up to 12 MBPS.<br />
• D type 9 pin connector is applied.<br />
• Control, monitoring and setting parameters can<br />
be achieved via the Profibus connection.<br />
• Setting is possible only when DPV1 is<br />
implemented.<br />
• Refer to section 7.8.9 page 73 for programming.<br />
• Refer to the Profibus communication <strong>manual</strong><br />
section 17 page 145.<br />
Fiber optic<br />
output #1<br />
Fiber optic<br />
output #3<br />
Fiber optic<br />
output #5<br />
Fiber optic<br />
Input #7<br />
Fiber optic<br />
Input #8<br />
Fiber optic<br />
Input #9<br />
Phase L1 firing control via fiber optic wire.<br />
Phase L2 firing control via fiber optic wire.<br />
Phase L3 firing control via fiber optic wire.<br />
Feedback signal from phase L1.<br />
Feedback signal from phase L2.<br />
Feedback signal from phase L3.<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
28 • Technical Data<br />
Indication Description Remarks<br />
Pin 1 – L1 Voltage<br />
Pin 2 – No Connection<br />
Pin 3 – CT – L1(grounded)<br />
Pin 4 – CT – L1<br />
Pin 5 – No Connection<br />
Pin 6 – L2 Voltage<br />
Pin 7 – No Connection<br />
Pin 8 – CT – L2 (grounded)<br />
Pin 9 – CT – L2<br />
Pin 10 – No Connection<br />
Pin 11 – L3 Voltage<br />
Pin 12 – No Connection<br />
Pin 13 – CT – L3 (grounded)<br />
Pin 14 – CT – L3<br />
Pin 15 – No Connection<br />
15 pins<br />
connector<br />
G Connection to ground For proper operation and for safety reasons the<br />
Control Module must be properly grounded.<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
29 • Technical Data<br />
Figure 13 – Control Module Input/Output<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
30 • Technical Data<br />
4.7.1 Input Terminal 7 - Test/Reset/MULTI SOFT STOP<br />
Input from a N.O. contact – the functions described above are selected from the keypad (refer to section<br />
7.8.7 page 71) or software commands sent via the communication protocol (Modbus or Profibus).<br />
When RESET function is selected - connect terminal 7 using a N.O. momentary contact, to control input<br />
voltage to reset the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN.<br />
When TEST function is selected - connect terminal 7 to control input voltage (use a N.O. contact) to conduct<br />
a firing test to the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN. For more details on the firing test refer to section 14.3 page 117.<br />
When MULTI SOFT STOP optional function is selected - connect terminal 7 to control input voltage (use a<br />
N.O. contact) to operate the soft starter in a Multi Soft Stop procedure.<br />
For wiring diagram refer to section 5.12 page 37.<br />
For programming refer to section 7.8.7 page 71.<br />
4.7.2 Input Terminal 8 - Dual Adjust/Reset<br />
Input from a N.O. contact - selection between above functions is made from the keypad (refer to section<br />
7.8.7 page 71) or through the communication (Modbus or Profibus).<br />
When DUAL ADJUSTMENT function is selected - connect terminal 8 to Control Input voltage to operate the<br />
<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN with the DUAL ADJUSTMENT characteristic. DUAL ADJUSTMENT characteristic is programmed<br />
as explained in section 7.8.5 page 68. You can switch between the primary and DUAL ADJUSTMENT<br />
settings before and/or during starting.<br />
When RESET function is selected - connect terminal 8 to Control Input voltage (use a N.O. momentary<br />
contact) to reset the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN.<br />
For wiring diagram refer to section 5.9 page 34.<br />
For programming refer to section 7.8.7 page 71.<br />
4.7.3 Output Terminals 10, 11 & 12 – Immediate/# Strts PreAlarm<br />
Programmable functions (refer to section 7.8.7 page 71):<br />
IMMEDIATE (after start signal) - when immediate is selected, the relay is energized upon the START signal.<br />
The relay is de-energized when one of the following occurs:<br />
• Fault<br />
• Control Supply outage<br />
• STOP signal<br />
When SOFT STOP is operated - the relay is de-energized at the end of the SOFT STOP process.<br />
The relay incorporates on and off delays of 0-3600 sec. each.<br />
The immediate relay can be used for the following purposes:<br />
• Interlock with other systems<br />
• Signalling<br />
• Delay the opening of a Line Contactor at the end of SOFT STOP, thus allowing current to decrease to zero<br />
before opening the contactor<br />
• Switch to / from Dual Adjustment settings with a time delay from the START signal (see Special Starting<br />
section 13.5.3.1 page 113).<br />
• # Strts PreAlarm detection - When configured to # STRTS PREALARM the relay is energized if a start<br />
command will cause the soft starter to trip on TOO MANY STARTS.<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
31 • Recommended Wiring Diagrams<br />
5. RECOMMENDED WIRING DIAGRAMS<br />
5.1 Control Supply and Control Inputs From a Single Source<br />
Notes:<br />
• Use this diagram when Control Supply, Control<br />
Input and Control Inputs for the External Faults<br />
are all from the same source.<br />
• If External Faults are not used leave terminals<br />
19, 20 and 21 not connected.<br />
• Supply must be protected from short circuit and<br />
over load. 10A fuse must be used.<br />
• It is recommended to use a separate fuse for<br />
the auxiliary circuits.<br />
5.2 Separate Sources for Control Supply and Control Inputs<br />
Notes:<br />
• Use this diagram when Control Supply and<br />
Control Input are all from the same source.<br />
• If External Faults are not used leave terminals<br />
19, 20 and 21 not connected.<br />
• Supply must be protected for short circuit and<br />
over load. 10A fuse must be used.<br />
• It is recommended to use a separate fuse for the<br />
auxiliary circuits.<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
32 • Recommended Wiring Diagrams<br />
5.3 Three Separate Sources for Control Supply and Control Inputs<br />
Notes:<br />
• Use this diagram when three separate<br />
sources for:<br />
o Control Supply<br />
o Control Input<br />
o Control Input for the External<br />
Faults<br />
• Supply must be protected for short circuit<br />
and over load. 10A fuse must be used.<br />
• It is recommended to use a separate fuse<br />
for the auxiliary circuits.<br />
5.4 Soft Start and Immediate Stop (No Soft Stop)<br />
Notes:<br />
• When switch A closes the motor will soft<br />
start.<br />
• When switch A opens the motor will stop<br />
immediately (no soft stop).<br />
• Drawing shows Control Supply and<br />
Control Input from the same source. Refer<br />
to section 5.2 and 5.3 for Control Supply<br />
and Control Input from separate sources.<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
5.5 Soft Start and Soft Stop wiring<br />
Notes:<br />
• When switch B closes the motor will soft<br />
start.<br />
• When switch B opens the motor will soft<br />
stop.<br />
• Drawing shows Control Supply and<br />
Control Input from the same source. Refer<br />
to section 5.2 and 5.3 for Control Supply<br />
and Control Input from separate sources.<br />
33 • Recommended Wiring Diagrams<br />
5.6 Soft Start, Soft Stop and Immediate Stop Wiring<br />
Notes:<br />
• When switch B closes the motor will soft<br />
start.<br />
• When switch B opens the motor will soft<br />
stop.<br />
• Switch A opens the motor will stop<br />
immediately.<br />
• Drawing shows Control Supply and<br />
Control Input from the same source. Refer<br />
to section 5.2 and 5.3 for Control Supply<br />
and Control Input from separate sources.<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
34 • Recommended Wiring Diagrams<br />
5.7 Soft Start, Soft Stop and Stop<br />
Notes:<br />
• Switch A can be used as an immediate stop.<br />
• Switch B is used as a soft stop command to<br />
the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN.<br />
• Switch C is used as a momentary or<br />
maintained start command to the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN.<br />
• Drawing shows Control Supply and Control<br />
Input from the same source. Refer to section<br />
5.2 and 5.3 for Control Supply and Control<br />
Input from separate sources.<br />
5.8 External Fault<br />
Notes:<br />
• Switches E1 and E2 can be used as<br />
EXTERNAL FAULT input.<br />
• Drawing shows Control Supply and Control<br />
Input from the same source. Refer to section<br />
5.2 and 5.3 for Control Supply and Control<br />
Input from separate sources.<br />
5.9 Dual Adjustment (Control Input #8)<br />
Notes:<br />
When two set of starting/stopping parameters are required (for example for loaded/unloaded motor<br />
or for multistart applications) do the following:<br />
• In I/O PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS mode page set PROG. INPUT #8 to DUAL<br />
ADJUSTMENT(default setting).<br />
• Set first set of parameters in the MAIN & PROTECT, START PARAMETERS and STOP<br />
PARAMETERS mode pages:<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
35 • Recommended Wiring Diagrams<br />
MOTOR FLA, INITIAL VOLTAGE, CURRENT LIMIT, ACC. TIME and DEC. TIME.<br />
• Set second set of parameters in the DUAL ADJUSTMENT PARAMETERS mode page:<br />
DA: MOTOR FLA, DA: INIT. VOLT., DA: CUR. LIMIT, DA: ACC. TIME and DA: DEC. TIME.<br />
• Start the motor with the primary set of parameters when switch D is open. Start the motor with the<br />
DA set of parameters when switch D is closed.<br />
• Note that it is possible to change the starting parameters also during soft start or soft stop. (refer<br />
to section 13.5.3 page 112.)<br />
• Note that if PROG. INPUT #8 is set to RESET than a momentary switch should be used for reset<br />
input to the soft starter.<br />
5.10 Bypass Contactor<br />
Notes:<br />
• End of Acceleration relay is energized after a programmed time delay RUN CONTACT DLY. Refer to<br />
section 7.8.3 page 60 for programming.<br />
• The End of Acceleration relay is de-energized when:<br />
o SOFT STOP or STOP signals are initiated<br />
o Fault condition occurs.<br />
• When a SOFT STOP signal is provided, the End of Acceleration relay returns to its original position<br />
thus opening the Bypass Contactor. Thereafter, the voltage will gradually ramp down to zero, soft<br />
stopping the motor.<br />
• Use an interposing relay (not shown) to control the Bypass Contactor.<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
36 • Recommended Wiring Diagrams<br />
5.11 Operating via Communication Links<br />
Notes:<br />
• In order to operate via communication, either Modbus or Profibus optional PCBs must be installed<br />
and wired properly.<br />
• In addition, optional Relay PCB must be installed in the control nodule. The optional Relay PCB will<br />
close a contact (terminals 31 & 32) when start signal is initiated via communication. This contact<br />
typically controls the Line Contactor via RS relay. When Line Contactor is closed mains power I<br />
connected to L1, L2 and L3.<br />
• Start command to the soft starter (terminal 6) is initiated by an auxiliary contact from the Line<br />
Contactor in series to an auxiliary start relay (RS) thus ensuring that the Line Contactor is closed.<br />
• <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN must be programmed to enable control (not only monitoring). Refer to section 7.8.8 and<br />
7.8.9 page 73 for programming.<br />
• Make sure that after programming, Control Supply voltage is disconnected and reconnected so that<br />
the communication settings will take affect.<br />
• <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN will close the start/stop relay via communication commands UNLESS switches A or B are<br />
opened.<br />
WARNING! Beware!<br />
<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Control Module and Power Section must be grounded at all times.<br />
When testing the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN control/communication it is possible to use the<br />
Control Module only without the Power Section.<br />
The Control Module MUST be properly grounded to avoid danger of<br />
electrical shock!!<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
5.12 Control Input #7<br />
Notes:<br />
• Switch D can be used as a Test<br />
input/RESET/MULTI SOFT STOP (optional) as<br />
programmed in I/O PROGRAMMING<br />
PARAMETERS. Refer to section 7.8.7 page 71.<br />
• MULTI SOFT STOP is applicable only when an<br />
optional software for MULTI SOFT STOP is<br />
installed.<br />
• RESET function requires a momentary contact<br />
to operate.<br />
• Test function is a unique feature of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-<br />
DN to test the operation of the firing system of<br />
the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN. Refer to section 14.3 page 117.<br />
• Drawing shows Control Supply and Control<br />
Input from the same source. Refer to section<br />
5.2 and 5.3 for Control Supply and Control Input<br />
from separate sources.<br />
37 • Recommended Wiring Diagrams<br />
5.13 Control Input #8<br />
Notes:<br />
• Switch D can be used as a DUAL<br />
ADJUST/RESET as programmed in I/O<br />
PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS. Refer to<br />
section 7.8.7 page 71. Refer also to section 5.9<br />
page 34.<br />
• RESET function requires a momentary contact<br />
to operate.<br />
• Drawing shows Control Supply and Control<br />
Input from the same source. Refer to section<br />
5.2 and 5.3 for Control Supply and Control Input<br />
from separate sources.<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
38 • Installation of IP00 (OEM Kit) in a Cabinet<br />
6. INSTALLATION OF IP00 (OEM KIT) IN A CABINET<br />
6.1 Mounting<br />
The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN must be mounted vertically. Allow sufficient space for suitable airflow above and below the<br />
<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN.<br />
Verify that minimum clearances specified in the below table, comply with the specified clearance ratings for<br />
the specified voltage. In addition, when glass epoxy of any-type or thickness is utilized within the cabinet<br />
assembly, minimum clearances must comply to below table:<br />
Maximum Voltage<br />
for Apparatus<br />
Minimum<br />
Clearance phase<br />
to earth<br />
Minimum<br />
Clearance phase<br />
to phase<br />
[kV] [mm] [mm]<br />
2.3<br />
3.3<br />
60 60<br />
4.16<br />
6<br />
6.6<br />
60 90<br />
10<br />
11<br />
13.2<br />
13.8<br />
15<br />
90 120<br />
120 160<br />
Notes:<br />
(1) Do not mount the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN near heat sources.<br />
(2) Cabinet internal temperature should not exceed 50°C. Refer to section 6.2 page 40 for heat dissipation of<br />
the soft starter during operation.<br />
(3) Protect the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN from dust and corrosive atmospheres.<br />
(4) In order to perform low voltage test, certain provisions should be applied:<br />
a. When a step-down transformer provides the Control Voltage, allow for supply of Control<br />
Voltage from external source<br />
b. In <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV, allow sufficient access to the rear side of the EPT-Tx (to allow low<br />
voltage Test Harness connection).<br />
c. To allow phase disassembly, provide for the following assembly precautions (Refer to Figure 14)<br />
for:<br />
i. Horizontal support bar (this bar is mounted on the inner side of the M.V. door).<br />
ii. Two support rods 850mm length with M12 thread.<br />
For phase disassembly, the horizontal support bar is mounted at the front of the cabinet,<br />
bracing the support rods.<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
39 • Installation of IP00 (OEM Kit) in a Cabinet<br />
Location of support bar when in<br />
use for phase disassembly<br />
EPT-Tx<br />
Location of support bar<br />
when not in use (option 1)<br />
Location of support bar<br />
when not in use (option 2)<br />
M12 thread<br />
Figure 14 – <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV - Phase Disassembly Accessories<br />
Set of support rods Ø12mm<br />
made of steel SAE1020<br />
6.1.1 Low Voltage Section<br />
(1) Control Module should be installed in a convenient place allowing access from every direction (this is<br />
achieved by mounting it on a hinged plate).<br />
(2) Due to fiber optic being a frail conductor, insert the fiber optic wires only at assembly completion.<br />
(3) Avoid fiber optic wires bending or stretching (minimal bending radius of 4 cm).<br />
(4) Avoid fiber optic wires installation near heat source.<br />
(5) Control Module and EPT-Rx cases are well grounded.<br />
Refer to standard cabinet wiring as detailed in section 10 page 83.<br />
6.2 Temperature Range & Heat Dissipation<br />
The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN is rated to operate within a temperature range of -10°C (14°F) to + 50°C (122°F).<br />
Relative non-condensed humidity inside the enclosure must not exceed 95%.<br />
ATTENTION! Operating the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN with a surrounding air temperature that is higher than<br />
50ºC will cause derating.<br />
Operating the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN with a surrounding air temperature that is higher than<br />
60ºC may cause damage to the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN.<br />
During soft start the maximum heat dissipation in Watts is as follows:<br />
2,300V – 24xFLC [W]<br />
3,300V – 72xFLC [W]<br />
4,160V – 72xFLC [W]<br />
6,600V – 72xFLC [W]<br />
10,000V – 120xFLC [W]<br />
11,000V – 120xFLC [W] – for marine applications: 144xFLC [W]<br />
13,800V – 144xFLC [W] – for marine applications: 168xFLC [W]<br />
15,000V – 192xFLC [W]<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
40 • Installation of IP00 (OEM Kit) in a Cabinet<br />
6.3 Control Module Main PCB and Optional PCBs<br />
Figure 15 - <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Control Module<br />
Remove top cover of the Control Module to access the main PCB, optional PCBs and dip switches.<br />
6.4 Dip Switch Settings on the Main PCB<br />
The dip switch has eight separate switches. It is located under the front cover of the Control Module.<br />
No. Switch Function Switch Off Switch On<br />
1 Display format Minimized Maximized<br />
2 Tacho feedback Disabled Enabled<br />
3 Must be off - -<br />
4 Must be off - -<br />
5 LCD language selection See tables below section 6.4.3 page 41.<br />
6<br />
7 Extended settings Disabled Enabled<br />
8 Software lock Open Locked<br />
6.4.1 Switch # 1 – Display Modes<br />
Two display modes are available:<br />
Maximized – display of all possible parameters.<br />
Minimized – display of pre-selected parameters.<br />
Setting switch # 1 to off will minimize the LCD displays.<br />
Refer also to section 7.7 page 51.<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
41 • Installation of IP00 (OEM Kit) in a Cabinet<br />
Maximized Mode - Switch #1 – On<br />
Display only<br />
Main & Protect.<br />
Start parameters<br />
Stop parameters<br />
Dual adjustment<br />
Fault parameters<br />
I/O programming<br />
Communication parameters<br />
Statistical data<br />
Minimized Mode Switch #1 – Off<br />
Display only<br />
Main parameters<br />
Start parameters<br />
Stop parameters<br />
Statistical data<br />
6.4.2 Switch # 2 – Tacho Feedback (0-10VDC)<br />
Set switch #2 to on when using tacho feedback.<br />
Note:<br />
To operate tacho feedback consult with the factory for specific settings for each application.<br />
6.4.3 Switches # 5, 6 – Language Selection<br />
Language selection defined by the switch settings and software version shown on the internal label (shown on<br />
section 6.3 page 40).<br />
For software version: MVSTMB.GN-ddmmyy (where “ddmmyy” represents software version date in 6 digit<br />
format. i.e., 290108 refers to January 1 st , 2008)<br />
Language Switch #5 Switch #6 Position of Switches<br />
English Off Off<br />
French Off On<br />
German On Off<br />
Spanish On On<br />
For software version: MVSTMB.GN-ddmmyy-HB<br />
Language Switch #5 Switch #6 Position of Switches<br />
English Off Off<br />
Russian Off On<br />
Special Set On Off<br />
Chinese On On<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
42 • Installation of IP00 (OEM Kit) in a Cabinet<br />
6.4.4 Switch # 7 – Extended Settings<br />
EXTENDED SETTINGS corresponds to:<br />
Parameter Range Switch #7 - Off Range switch #7 - On<br />
INITIAL VOLTAGE 10-50% 5 (1) -80%<br />
CURRENT LIMIT 100-400% 700%<br />
with the maximum limitation of:<br />
440x(FLC/FLA)<br />
PULSE TIME 100-400% 700%<br />
If PULSE TIME>1sec, with the<br />
maximum limitation of:<br />
440x(FLC/FLA)<br />
ACCELERATION TIME 1-30 seconds 1-90 seconds<br />
DECLERATION TIME 0-30 seconds 0-90 seconds<br />
MAX. START TIME 1-30 seconds 1-250 seconds<br />
Note:<br />
(1) Setting the INITIAL VOLTAGE to lower than 10% is not practical for loaded motors.<br />
WARNING!<br />
Operator’s<br />
responsibility!<br />
EXTENDED SETTINGS are for use in very special applications only!<br />
Do not set to switch #7 to on unless <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN is significantly larger than the<br />
motor! When using extended settings for the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN you must be extremely<br />
careful to avoid damaging the motor or <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN.<br />
6.4.5 Switch # 8 – Software Lock<br />
The software lock prevents undesired parameter modifications.<br />
When locked, pressing the Store, ▼or ▲ keys causes the LCD to display UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS.<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
43 • Installation of IP00 (OEM Kit) in a Cabinet<br />
6.5 Analog I/O (Option 5) (Terminals Gnd, Out (-), Out (+))<br />
Figure 16 – Optional Analog PCB<br />
Analog PCB is located on the upper right side of the control nodule.<br />
(Refer to Figure 15 page 10)<br />
Ground Terminal (terminal Gnd)<br />
Leave this terminal not connected. Ground the shield of the analog output signal at the recipient side.<br />
Analog Output (Terminals Out (+), Out (-))<br />
Dip switches allow selection between: 0-10VDC, 0-20mA, 4-20mA<br />
The analog value is related to I, 0….200% of FLA (not programmable).<br />
In <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN 1000V models the analog value is related to I, 0….200% of FLC. In <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN 1000V models<br />
inverse programming is optional as well (refer to section 7.8.7 on page 71).<br />
Switch No. 4-20 mA* 0-20 mA 0-10VDC<br />
S1- Switch # 1 On On Off<br />
S1 - Switch # 2 On On Off<br />
S1 - Switch # 3 Off Off On<br />
S1 - Switch # 4 Off Off On<br />
S2 - Switch # 1 On Off Off<br />
S2 - Switch # 2 Not used Not used Not used<br />
* Factory default setting<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
44 • Installation of IP00 (OEM Kit) in a Cabinet<br />
6.6 Insulation test (Option 4) (Terminals 25, 26, 27 and Leak)<br />
When this option is installed, resistor units RU-7 (Un≤7,200V) or RU13 (7,200>Un≤13,800V) must be installed<br />
as shown:<br />
Figure 17 – Optional Insulation PCB Wiring<br />
Figure 18 – RU-7, Resistor Unit – Dimensional Drawing<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
6.7 Remote Key-Pad Installation<br />
45 • Installation of IP00 (OEM Kit) in a Cabinet<br />
Figure 19 - Remote Key Pad, Connection Cable and Control Module.<br />
Note: Cable length is 1.5 meters (consult with the factory if a longer cable is required).<br />
Figure 20 - Remote Key Pad - Dimensions<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
46 • Installation of IP00 (OEM Kit) in a Cabinet<br />
Figure 21 - Remote Key Pad - Mechanical Installation and Cut-out Dimensions<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
47 • Control Keypad<br />
7. CONTROL KEYPAD<br />
The control keypad is the link between the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN and the user.<br />
The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN control keypad features:<br />
(1) Two lines of 16 alphanumeric characters each with selectable languages – English, French,<br />
German, and Spanish. Russian and Chinese characters are optional and must be pre-ordered.<br />
(2) Six push-buttons (Mode, Reset, Select, Store, Up (▲) and down (▼) keys).<br />
(3) Eight indication LEDs (On, Start, Run, S.Stop, Stop, Test,, D.Adj., Fault)<br />
(1)<br />
(2)<br />
(3)<br />
7.1 LCD Arrangement<br />
CURRENT LIMIT<br />
390%<br />
Figure 22 - <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Control Keypad<br />
Upper line displays function.<br />
Lower line displays setting and\or measured values.<br />
7.2 Push-Buttons<br />
Scrolls through the display and programming menus of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN.<br />
Mode Note: Pressing Mode continuously increases the speed at which the parameters change.<br />
Select<br />
▲<br />
▼<br />
Store<br />
Reset<br />
When a mode name is displayed, pressing this button drills down to the parameters for that<br />
mode. When a parameter is displayed, pressing this button scrolls to the next parameter.<br />
Allows the operator to increment adjusted values shown in the display. Operator should press<br />
this button once to increment one value, or continuously to rapidly increment values up to the<br />
maximum value.<br />
Allows the operator to decrement adjusted values shown in the display. Operator should press<br />
this button once to decrement one value, or continuously to rapidly decrement values up to the<br />
minimum value.<br />
Stores modified parameters only when you have scrolled through all parameters and STORE<br />
ENABLE XXXXXX PARAMETERS is displayed. After you store a parameter successfully DATA<br />
SAVED OK message will display.<br />
Note: Pressing this button at any other time has no effect.<br />
Resets the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN after a fault has been dealt with and the start command has been removed<br />
(except for UNDERCURR. TRIP – Refer to section 7.8.6 page 69 parameter UNDER CUR.<br />
RESET). This cancels the fault displayed and allows you to restart the motor.<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
48 • Control Keypad<br />
7.3 Status LEDs<br />
Green On Lights when the control supply voltage is connected to the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN.<br />
Yellow Start Lights during soft start, indicating that motor supply voltage is ramping up.<br />
Green<br />
Yellow<br />
Run<br />
S.Stop<br />
Lights after completion of the starting process, indicating that motor is<br />
receiving full voltage.<br />
Lights during soft stop, indicating that the motor supply voltage is ramping<br />
down.<br />
Red Stop Lights when the motor is stopped.<br />
Yellow Test Lights when the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN is in TEST mode.<br />
Green D.Adj. Lights when DUAL ADJUSTMENT is in operation.<br />
Lights upon operation of any of the built-in protections.<br />
Flashes when:<br />
• Date and time are not set<br />
Red Fault • INSULATION ALARM optional relay is activated. Refer to section 7.8.6<br />
page 69.<br />
• Fault was detected but TRIP AFTER BYPASS is set to DISABLE.<br />
Refer to section 7.8.6 page 69.<br />
7.4 Reviewing and Modifying Parameters<br />
Press the Mode key several times until you reach the required mode page.<br />
Press the Select key to review parameters for this mode.<br />
Once you reach the required parameter, use the ▼ or ▲ keys to modify its value.<br />
To store the new parameters, press the Select key until the STORE ENABLE message displays and then<br />
press the Store key. The DATA SAVED OK message will display for 2 seconds.<br />
7.5 Upon first Control Voltage Connection<br />
Few seconds after first connection of control voltage the Fault LED will flash and the LCD will display:<br />
ALARM:<br />
SET TIME & DATE<br />
It is advised to set the time and date as described on section 7.6.6 on page 50.<br />
If time and date are not set properly no time stamp to the faults shown in the STATISTICAL DATA.<br />
Note:<br />
If the Reset button is pressed this message will not appear any more!!<br />
7.6 Special Actions Performed in TEST/MAINTENANCE Mode<br />
7.6.1 Run Self Test<br />
Press the Mode and ▼ keys simultaneously.<br />
The Test LED will light and the LCD will display:<br />
TEST/MAINTENANCE<br />
***OPTIONS***<br />
Press the Select key.<br />
The LCD will display:<br />
RUN SELF TEST ?<br />
PUSH UP ARROW<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Press the ▲ key.<br />
The Test LED will turn off and the LCD will display:<br />
SELF TEST PASSED<br />
49 • Control Keypad<br />
And after a few seconds the LCD will display:<br />
I1 I2 I3<br />
0 0 0 %<br />
7.6.2 View Software Version<br />
Press the Mode and ▼ keys simultaneously.<br />
The Test LED will light and the LCD will display:<br />
TEST/MAINTENANCE<br />
***OPTIONS***<br />
Press the Select key twice.<br />
The LCD will display:<br />
BTL-R-16/09/2008<br />
MVSTMB.GN-121008<br />
Press the Mode and ▼ keys simultaneously to exit the TEST/MAINTENANCE mode.<br />
The Test LED will turn off and he LCD will display:<br />
I1 I2 I3<br />
0 0 0 %<br />
7.6.3 Obtain Default Parameters<br />
Press the Mode and ▼ keys simultaneously.<br />
The Test LED will light and the LCD will display:<br />
TEST/MAINTENANCE<br />
***OPTIONS***<br />
Press the Select key three times.<br />
The LCD will display:<br />
STORE ENABLE<br />
DEFAULT PARAMET.<br />
Press the Store + Mode keys simultaneously.<br />
The Test LED will turn off and the LCD will display:<br />
DATA SAVED OK<br />
And after a few seconds the LCD will display:<br />
I1 I2 I3<br />
0 0 0 %<br />
CAUTION!<br />
Obtaining DEFAULT PARAMETERS erases all previously modified settings<br />
and requires the operator to reprogram all parameters that differ from the<br />
factory default.<br />
Note: It is especially important to reprogram the RATED LINE VOLTAGE and<br />
STARTER FLC (as shown on the label of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN) and all other<br />
parameters in MAIN & PROTECT mod page. Refer to section 7.8.2 page 55.<br />
7.6.4 Reset Statistical Data<br />
Press the Mode and ▼ keys simultaneously.<br />
The Test LED will light and the LCD will display:<br />
TEST/MAINTENANCE<br />
***OPTIONS***<br />
Press the Select key four times.<br />
The LCD will display:<br />
RESET STATISTICS<br />
Press the Reset + Store keys simultaneously.<br />
The Test LED will turn off and the LCD will display:<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
50 • Control Keypad<br />
DATA SAVED OK<br />
And after a few seconds the LCD will display:<br />
STATISTICAL DATA<br />
- **** -<br />
Press the Mode and go back to:<br />
I1 I2 I3<br />
0 0 0 %<br />
7.6.5 Calibrate Voltage and Current (Factory Use Only!)<br />
Press the Mode and ▼ keys simultaneously.<br />
The Test LED will light and the LCD will display:<br />
TEST/MAINTENANCE<br />
***OPTIONS***.<br />
Press the Select key five times.<br />
The LCD will display:<br />
VOLTAGE ADJUST.<br />
98 % OF Vn<br />
Press the Select key.<br />
The LCD will display:<br />
CURRENT ADJUST.<br />
23 % OF FLC<br />
Press the Mode and ▼ keys simultaneously to exit the TEST/MAINTENANCE mode.<br />
The Test LED will turn off and he LCD will display:<br />
I1 I2 I3<br />
0 0 0 %<br />
7.6.6 Setting Time and Date<br />
Press the Mode and ▼ keys simultaneously.<br />
The Test LED will light and the LCD will display:<br />
TEST/MAINTENANCE<br />
***OPTIONS***.<br />
Press the Select key seven times.<br />
The LCD will display:<br />
hh.mm mm.dd.yy<br />
09:10 01/19/08<br />
Pay attention to the under line mark under the hour value.<br />
modify the hour value with or keys.<br />
Press Store key.<br />
The LCD will display:<br />
hh.mm mm.dd.yy<br />
12:10 01/29/08<br />
Pay attention to the under line mark under the minutes value.<br />
Repeat the same procedure as for the hour settings to the minutes, day, month and year settings.<br />
After Store key is pressed last time the LCD will display:<br />
TEST/MAINTENANCE<br />
***OPTIONS***<br />
Press the Mode and ▼ keys simultaneously to exit the TEST/MAINTENANCE mode.<br />
The Test LED will turn off and he LCD will display:<br />
I1 I2 I3<br />
0 0 0 %<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
7.7 Mode Pages<br />
Upon initiation of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN, the LCD displays motor’s operating current:<br />
I1 I2 I3<br />
0 0 0 %<br />
You can review all mode pages by pressing the Mode key:<br />
MAIN & PROTECT.<br />
- **** -<br />
START PARAMETERS<br />
- **** -<br />
STOP PARAMETERS<br />
- **** -<br />
DUAL ADJUSTMENT<br />
PARAMETERS<br />
FAULT PARAMETERS<br />
- **** -<br />
I/O PROGRAMMING<br />
PARAMETERS<br />
COMM. PARAMETERS<br />
- **** -<br />
STATISTICAL DATA<br />
- **** -<br />
These pages are skipped if <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN is programmed to<br />
MINIMIZED MODE and are shown only in MAXIMIZED MODE.<br />
Refer to section 6.4.1 on page 40 for changing mode from<br />
MINIMIZED MODE to MAXIMIZED MODE.<br />
51 • Control Keypad<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
52 • Control Keypad<br />
7.8 Overview of All Mode Pages and Factory Defaults<br />
DISPLAY MODE PAGE<br />
Display and default<br />
values<br />
I1 I2 I3<br />
0 0 0 %<br />
MAIN & PROTECT<br />
- **** -<br />
Display and default<br />
values<br />
RATED LINE VOLT.<br />
6600 VOLT<br />
START PARAMETERS<br />
- **** -<br />
Display and default<br />
values<br />
SOFT START CURVE<br />
1 (STANDARD)<br />
STOP PARAMETERS<br />
- **** -<br />
Display and default<br />
values<br />
SOFT STOP CURVE<br />
1(STANDARD)<br />
Appears only in<br />
MAXIMIZED MODE (1)<br />
DUAL ADJUSTMENT<br />
PARAMETERS<br />
Display and default<br />
values<br />
DA: INIT. VOLT.<br />
30%<br />
I1 I2 I3<br />
0 0 0 A<br />
STARTER FLC<br />
150 AMP.<br />
START TACHO. GAIN<br />
0(MIN. GAIN)<br />
STOP TACHO. GAIN<br />
0(MIN. GAIN)<br />
DA: INIT. CURRENT<br />
100%<br />
VOLTAGE FREQ.<br />
3,300V 49.9Hz<br />
MOTOR FLA<br />
150 AMP.<br />
PULSE LEVEL<br />
70% OF FLA<br />
DEC. TIME<br />
0 SEC.<br />
DA: CUR. LIMIT<br />
400% OF FLA<br />
POWER<br />
1,500 KW<br />
RATED MOTOR PWR<br />
1000 KW<br />
PULSE TIME<br />
0.0 SEC.<br />
FINAL TORQUE<br />
0 (MIN.)<br />
DA: ACC. TIME<br />
10 SEC.<br />
REACTIVE POWER<br />
500 KVAR<br />
SERVICE FACTOR<br />
100 %<br />
INITIAL VOLTAGE<br />
30 %<br />
STORE ENABLE<br />
STOP PARAMETERS<br />
DA: DEC. TIME<br />
0 SEC.<br />
POWER FACTOR<br />
0.85<br />
UNDERCURR. TRIP<br />
0% OF FLA<br />
INITIAL CURRENT<br />
100 %<br />
DA: MOTOR FLA<br />
150 AMP.<br />
THERMAL CAPACITY<br />
0 %<br />
UNDERCURR. DELAY<br />
10 SEC.<br />
CURRENT LIMIT<br />
400% OF FLA<br />
STORE ENABLE<br />
D. ADJ. PARAMETERS<br />
MOTOR INSULATION<br />
52.8Mohm<br />
O/C – SHEAR PIN<br />
850% OF FLA<br />
ACC. TIME<br />
10 SEC.<br />
OPTION CARD<br />
NOT INSTALLED<br />
O/C DELAY<br />
0.5 SEC.<br />
MAX. START TIME<br />
30 SEC.<br />
OVERLOAD CLASS<br />
IEC CLASS 10<br />
NUMBER OF STARTS<br />
1<br />
OVERLOAD PROTECT<br />
ENABLE WHILE RUN<br />
STARTS PERIOD<br />
20 MIN.<br />
UNBALANCE TRIP<br />
20% OF FLA<br />
START INHIBIT<br />
15 MIN.<br />
UNBALANCE DELAY<br />
5 SEC.<br />
RUN CONTACT DLY<br />
5 sec.<br />
GND FAULT TRIP<br />
20% OF FLA<br />
STORE ENABLE<br />
START PARAMETERS<br />
GND FAULT DELAY<br />
5 SEC.<br />
UNDERVOLT. TRIP<br />
70% OF Vn<br />
UNDERVOLT. DELAY<br />
5 SEC.<br />
OVERVOLT. TRIP<br />
120% OF Vn<br />
OVEERVOLT. DELAY<br />
2 SEC.<br />
STORE ENABLE<br />
MAIN & PROTECT.<br />
(1) - Refer to section 6.4.1 on page 40 for changing mode from MINIMIZED MODE to MAXIMIZED MODE.<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
53 • Control Keypad<br />
Appears only in<br />
MAXIMIZED MODE (1)<br />
Appears only in<br />
MAXIMIZED MODE (1)<br />
Appears only in<br />
MAXIMIZED MODE (1)<br />
Appears when in<br />
TEST/MAINTENANCE (2)<br />
FAULT PARAMETERS<br />
- **** -<br />
Display and default<br />
values<br />
UV & PL AUTO RST<br />
NO<br />
I/O PROGRAMMING<br />
PARAMETERS<br />
Display and default values<br />
PROG. INPUT #7<br />
RESET<br />
COMM.PARAMETERS<br />
- **** -<br />
Display and default<br />
values<br />
COMM. PROTOCOL<br />
MODBUS<br />
STATISTICAL DATA<br />
- **** -<br />
Display and default<br />
values<br />
T SINCE LST STRT<br />
NO DATA<br />
TEST/MAINTENANCE<br />
***OPTIONS***<br />
Display and default<br />
values<br />
RUN SELF TEST?<br />
PUSH UP ARROW<br />
UNDER CUR. RESET<br />
OFF<br />
PROG. INPUT #8<br />
DUAL ADJUSTMENT<br />
BAUD RATE<br />
9600 (MODBUS)<br />
LAST STRT PERIOD<br />
NO DATA<br />
PROGRAM VERSION<br />
MVSTMB.GN-110808<br />
BYPASS OPEN TRIP<br />
ENABLE<br />
FAULT RELAY TYPE<br />
FAULT<br />
PARITY CHECK<br />
EVEN<br />
LAST STRT MAX I<br />
NO DATA<br />
STORE ENABLE<br />
DEFAULT PARAMET.<br />
TRIP AFTER BYPASS<br />
ENABLE<br />
IMM/ S.PIN RELAY<br />
IMMEDIATE<br />
SERIAL LINK NO.<br />
OFF<br />
TOTAL RUN TIME<br />
0 HOURS<br />
RESET STATISTICS<br />
BY-PASS AUTO RST<br />
NO<br />
RELAY ON DELAY<br />
0 SEC.<br />
S. LINK PAR. SAVE<br />
DISABLE<br />
TOTAL # OF START<br />
0<br />
VOLTAGE ADJUST.<br />
15 % OF Vn<br />
SET CURVE 0 FLT<br />
ENABLE<br />
RELAY OFF DELAY<br />
0 SEC.<br />
SER. LINK CONTROL<br />
DISABLE<br />
TOTAL ENERGY<br />
0 KWH<br />
CURRENT ADJUST<br />
99% OF FLC<br />
PWR ON & NO STRT<br />
ENABLE<br />
ANALOG OUTPUT<br />
NORMAL<br />
FRONT COM ADDRES<br />
OFF<br />
TOTAL R. ENERGY<br />
0 KVARH<br />
hh.mm mm.dd.yy<br />
00:00 01/01/00<br />
INSULATION ALARM<br />
OFF<br />
INSULATION TRIP<br />
OFF<br />
STORE ENABLE<br />
I/O PROG.PARAM.<br />
STORE ENABLE<br />
COMM. PARAMETERS<br />
Applicable when<br />
Modbus optional<br />
PCB installed<br />
LAST TRIP<br />
NO DATA<br />
TRIP CURRENT<br />
0 % OF FLA<br />
PHASE SEQUENCE<br />
POSITIVE<br />
Applicable when<br />
profibus optional<br />
PCB installed<br />
TOTAL # OF TRIPS<br />
0<br />
STORE ENABLE<br />
FAULT PARAMETERS<br />
COMM. PROTOCOL<br />
PROFIBUS<br />
BAUD RATE<br />
AUTO (PROFIBUS)<br />
PROFI.NETWORK ID<br />
OFF<br />
LAST 10 TRIPS<br />
hh.mm mm.dd.yy<br />
.<br />
.<br />
.<br />
.<br />
.<br />
S. LINK PAR. SAVE<br />
DISABLE<br />
PREVIOUS TRIP -10<br />
hh.mm mm.dd.yy<br />
SER. LINK CONTROL<br />
DISABLE<br />
FRONT COM ADDRES<br />
OFF<br />
STORE ENABLE<br />
COMM. PARAMETERS<br />
(1) - Refer to section 6.4.1 on page 40 for changing mode from MINIMIZED MODE to MAXIMIZED MODE.<br />
(2) - Refer to section 7.6 on page 48 for entering TEST/MAINTENANCE.<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
54 • Control Keypad<br />
7.8.1 Display Mode – Page 0<br />
I1 I2 I3<br />
0 0 0 %<br />
Display<br />
I1 I2 I3<br />
0 0 0 %<br />
I1 I2 I3<br />
0 0 0 A<br />
Displays in MINIMIZED MODE and MAXIMIZED MODE<br />
Description<br />
Displays operating current in each of the three phases as a percentage of motor<br />
FLA (Full Load Ampere).<br />
<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN’s Default Display. After pressing the Mode or Select keys, a time<br />
delay is initiated. Following the delay the LCD returns to this display.<br />
Displays the current of the motor in Ampere.<br />
VOLTAGE<br />
3300V<br />
POWER<br />
0 KW<br />
FREQ.<br />
49.9Hz<br />
Displays line voltage and frequency.<br />
Frequency is displayed after start command only.<br />
Displays motor power in kW.<br />
REACTIVE POWER<br />
0 KVAR<br />
POWER FACTOR<br />
0.83<br />
THERMAL CAPACITY<br />
0 %<br />
MOTOR INSULATION<br />
52.8Mohm<br />
OPTION CARD<br />
Not Installed<br />
Displays motor reactive power in kVAR.<br />
Displays motor power factor.<br />
Displays motor’s THERMAL CAPACITY in %.<br />
When THERMAL CAPACITY is 100% motor will trip on OVERLOAD.<br />
Displays the motor winding insulation level (displays only if the optional motor<br />
insulation PCB is installed).<br />
Displays only if there is no motor insulation or analog optional PCBs installed in<br />
the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN.<br />
Note:<br />
This ignores the optional communication PCBs. Even if a communication PCB is<br />
installed this message can display.<br />
Notes:<br />
In this page parameters cannot be programmed.<br />
Browsing the display in Display Mode is possible by pressing the Select key or the or keys.<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
55 • Control Keypad<br />
7.8.2 Main & Protect. – Page 1<br />
MAIN & PROTECT.<br />
- **** -<br />
Display and Default<br />
Values<br />
RATED LINE VOLT.<br />
6600 VOLT<br />
STARTER FLC<br />
150 AMP.<br />
MOTOR FLA<br />
150 AMP.<br />
Range<br />
Displays in MINIMIZED MODE and MAXIMIZED MODE<br />
Description<br />
2300-15000 Sets <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN’s rated voltage.<br />
<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN’s rate voltage should be as shown on its label. Refer<br />
to section Error! Reference source not found. on page Error!<br />
Bookmark not defined..<br />
Note:<br />
Setting RATED LINE VOLTAGE to other than the value on the<br />
label will cause a wrong operation and wrong readings of the<br />
soft starter.<br />
20 – 1800A Sets <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN’s FLC (Full Load Current)<br />
<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN’s FLC should be as shown on its label. Refer to<br />
section Error! Reference source not found. on page Error!<br />
Bookmark not defined..<br />
Note:<br />
Setting FLC to other than the value on the label will cause a<br />
30-100% of<br />
STARTER<br />
FLC<br />
wrong operation and wrong readings of the soft starter.<br />
Sets motor’s FLA (Full load Ampere)<br />
Should be programmed as shown on the motor’s name plate.<br />
RATED MOTOR PWR<br />
1000 KW<br />
50-40000KW<br />
Sets motor rated power as indicated on its name plate.<br />
SERVICE FACTOR<br />
100%<br />
100-130% Sets motor rated service factor as indicated on its name plate.<br />
UNDERCURR. TRIP<br />
0% OF FLA<br />
UNDERCURR. DELAY<br />
10 SEC.<br />
O/C – SHEAR PIN<br />
850% OF FLA<br />
O/C DELAY<br />
0.5 SEC.<br />
0%(=OFF)/<br />
20-90% of FLA<br />
1-40SEC.<br />
100-850% of<br />
motor’s FLA<br />
setting<br />
0.0 – 5sec.<br />
Note:<br />
When set to<br />
0.0 it is<br />
practically up<br />
to 200msec.<br />
Sets UNDER CURRENT TRIP protection.<br />
Sets the time delay for UNDER CURRENT TRIP protection.<br />
Trips the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN when the motor current drops below the<br />
level that was set for a time period longer than UNDER<br />
CURRENT DELAY.<br />
Note:<br />
• Operational when the motor is running (the RUN LED is lit).<br />
• Can be set to AUTO RESET. Refer to section 7.8.6 page<br />
69.<br />
Sets OVER CURRENT SHEAR PIN protection.<br />
Sets O/C – SHEAR PIN DELAY time.<br />
Operational when <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN is energized and has three trip<br />
functions:<br />
At all time - If I > 850% of FLC it trips the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN within 1<br />
cycle (overrides the value of the O/C – SHEAR PIN setting).<br />
At starting process - If I > 850% of FLA it trips the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN<br />
after O/C DELAY (see here after)<br />
At run time - If I > O/C – SHEAR PIN setting of FLA it trips the<br />
<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN after O/C DELAY.<br />
Note:<br />
The OVER CURRENT SHEAR PIN protection is not intended<br />
to replace fast acting fuses to protect from short current!<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
56 • Control Keypad<br />
MAIN & PROTECT.<br />
- **** -<br />
Display and Default<br />
Values<br />
OVERLOAD CLASS<br />
IEC CLASS 10<br />
OVERLOAD PROTECT<br />
ENABLE WHILE RUN<br />
UNBALANCE TRIP<br />
20% OF FLA<br />
UNBALANCE DELAY<br />
5 SEC.<br />
GND FAULT TRIP<br />
20% OF FLA<br />
GND FAULT DELAY<br />
5 SEC.<br />
UNDERVOLT. TRIP<br />
70% OF Vn<br />
UNDERVOLT. DELAY<br />
5 SEC.<br />
OVERVOLT. TRIP<br />
120% OF Vn<br />
OVERVOLT. DELAY<br />
2 SEC.<br />
Range<br />
IEC CLASS 5/<br />
IEC CLASS 10/<br />
IEC CLASS 15/<br />
IEC CLASS 20/<br />
IEC CLASS 25/<br />
IEC CLASS 30/<br />
NEMA CLASS 5/<br />
NEMA CLASS 10/<br />
NEMA CLASS 15/<br />
NEMA CLASS 20/<br />
NEMA CLASS 25/<br />
NEMA CLASS 30/<br />
DISABLE/<br />
ENABLE<br />
WHILE RUN/<br />
ENABLE<br />
10-100%/ OFF<br />
1 –60sec.<br />
10-100%/OFF<br />
1 –60sec.<br />
50-90%<br />
1 –10sec.<br />
110-125%/<br />
OFF<br />
1 –10sec.<br />
Displays in MINIMIZED MODE and MAXIMIZED MODE<br />
Description<br />
Sets OVERLOAD CLASS characteristics<br />
Sets OVERLOAD PROTECT functionality.<br />
The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN allows motor protection according to IEC class<br />
5, 10, 15, 20, 25 or 30<br />
or according to NEMA class 5, 10, 15, 20, 25 or 30.<br />
Tripping curves are shown on section 7.8.2.1 page 58.<br />
The OVERLOAD protection incorporates a THERMAL<br />
CAPACITY register that calculates heating minus dissipation of<br />
the motor.<br />
The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN trips when the register fills up. (THERMAL<br />
CAPACITY=100%)<br />
The time constant, in seconds, for cool down after overload trip<br />
is:<br />
Class 5 10 15 20 25 30<br />
IEC 160 320 480 640 510 960<br />
NEMA 140 280 420 560 700 840<br />
The overload protection can be set to protect the motor as set<br />
in the OVERLOAD PROTECT parameter:<br />
ENABLE – motor is protected at all time.<br />
ENABLE WHILE RUN – motor is protected only when in Run.<br />
DISABLE – motor is not overload protected by the soft starter.<br />
Note:<br />
In order to restart after OVERLOAD trip, the thermal register<br />
should be 50% or less.<br />
Sets UNBALANCE TRIP level.<br />
Sets UNBALANCE TRIP DELAY.<br />
Trips the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN when current unbalance increases above<br />
level that was set for a time longer than UNBALANCE DELAY.<br />
Notes:<br />
Becomes operational after the start signal.<br />
Sets GND FAULT TRIP level.<br />
Sets GND FAULT TRIP DELAY.<br />
Trips the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN when ground current increases above level<br />
that was set for a time longer than UNBALANCE DELAY.<br />
Note:<br />
Becomes operational after the start signal.<br />
Sets UNDER VOLTAGE TRIP level.<br />
Sets UNDERVOLT TRIP DELAY.<br />
Trips the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN when mains voltage drops below the level<br />
that was set for a time longer than UNDERVOLT DELAY.<br />
Notes:<br />
• Becomes operational only after the start signal.<br />
• When voltage drops to zero (voltage outage) the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN<br />
will trip immediately, thus overriding the delay.<br />
• Can be set to AUTO RESET. Refer to section 7.8.6 page<br />
69.<br />
Sets OVER VOLTAGE TRIP.<br />
Sets OVERVOLT TRIP DELAY.<br />
Trips the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN when mains voltage increases above the<br />
level that was set for a time longer than OVERVOLT DELAY.<br />
Can not be set lower than the UNDER VOLTAGE setting.<br />
Note:<br />
Becomes operational only after the start signal.<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
MAIN & PROTECT.<br />
- **** -<br />
Display and Default<br />
Values<br />
STORE ENABLE<br />
MAIN & PROTECT.<br />
Range<br />
Displays in MINIMIZED MODE and MAXIMIZED MODE<br />
Description<br />
57 • Control Keypad<br />
Storing modified parameters<br />
To store selected parameters scroll through all parameters until<br />
you reach STORE ENABLE MAIN & PROTECT, then press the<br />
Store key.<br />
After you store a parameter successfully the DATA SAVED OK<br />
message will display.<br />
If <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN fails to store the parameter the LCD<br />
Will display the STORAGE ERROR message (refer to section<br />
8.2.4 on page 77 for more details).<br />
Note:<br />
Pressing the Store key when the STORE ENABLE XXXXX<br />
PARAMETERS message does not appear on the display has<br />
no effect.<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
58 • Control Keypad<br />
7.8.2.1 Tripping Curves of the Integrated Overload Protection<br />
The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN allows motor protection according to IEC class 5, 10, 15, 20, 25 or 30 OR according to NEMA<br />
class 5, 10, 15, 20, 25 or 30.<br />
IEC Class OVERLOAD curves<br />
Time [sec.]<br />
10000<br />
IEC Class 5<br />
1000<br />
Time [sec.]<br />
10000<br />
1000<br />
IEC Class 10<br />
100<br />
Cold<br />
10<br />
Hot<br />
1<br />
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8<br />
Current [I/FLA]<br />
100<br />
Cold<br />
10<br />
Hot<br />
1<br />
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8<br />
Current [I/FLA]<br />
100000<br />
IEC Class 15<br />
100000<br />
IEC Class 20<br />
Time [sec.]<br />
10000<br />
Time [sec.]<br />
10000<br />
1000<br />
1000<br />
100<br />
Cold<br />
100<br />
Cold<br />
10<br />
Hot<br />
10<br />
Hot<br />
1<br />
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8<br />
Current [I/FLA]<br />
1<br />
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8<br />
Current [I/FLA]<br />
100000<br />
IEC Class 25<br />
100000<br />
IEC Class 30<br />
Time [sec.]<br />
10000<br />
Time [sec.]<br />
10000<br />
1000<br />
1000<br />
100<br />
Cold<br />
100<br />
Cold<br />
10<br />
Hot<br />
10<br />
Hot<br />
1<br />
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8<br />
Current [I/FLA]<br />
1<br />
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8<br />
Current [I/FLA]<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
59 • Control Keypad<br />
NEMA Class OVERLOAD curves<br />
Time [sec.]<br />
10000<br />
1000<br />
100<br />
10<br />
1<br />
0.1<br />
NEMA Clas s 5<br />
Cold<br />
Hot<br />
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8<br />
Current [I/FLA]<br />
Time [sec.]<br />
10000<br />
NEMA Class 10<br />
1000<br />
100<br />
Cold<br />
10<br />
Hot<br />
1<br />
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8<br />
Current [I/FLA]<br />
100000<br />
NEMA Class 15<br />
100000<br />
NEMA Class 20<br />
Time [sec.]<br />
10000<br />
Time [sec.]<br />
10000<br />
1000<br />
1000<br />
100<br />
Cold<br />
100<br />
Cold<br />
10<br />
Hot<br />
1<br />
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8<br />
Current [I/FLA]<br />
10<br />
Hot<br />
1<br />
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8<br />
Current [I/FLA]<br />
100000<br />
NEMA Class 25<br />
100000<br />
NEMA Class 30<br />
Time [sec.]<br />
10000<br />
Time [sec.]<br />
10000<br />
1000<br />
1000<br />
100<br />
Cold<br />
100<br />
Cold<br />
10<br />
Hot<br />
10<br />
Hot<br />
1<br />
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8<br />
Current [I/FLA]<br />
1<br />
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8<br />
Current [I/FLA]<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
60 • Control Keypad<br />
7.8.3 Start Parameters – Page 2<br />
START PARAMETERS<br />
- **** -<br />
Display and Default<br />
Values<br />
SOFT START CURVE<br />
1 (STANDARD)<br />
START TACHO. GAIN<br />
0(MIN. GAIN)<br />
PULSE LEVEL<br />
70% OF FLA<br />
PULSE TIME<br />
0.0 SEC.<br />
Range<br />
0 (BASIC)/<br />
1 (STANDARD)/<br />
2 !!/<br />
3 !!/<br />
4 !!/<br />
5 (TORQUE)<br />
0 (MIN. GAIN)/<br />
1 !! /<br />
2 !!/<br />
3 !!/<br />
4 !!/<br />
5 !!/<br />
For PULSE<br />
TIME
61 • Control Keypad<br />
START PARAMETERS<br />
- **** -<br />
Display and Default<br />
Values<br />
INITIAL VOLTAGE<br />
30 %<br />
INITIAL CURRENT<br />
100 %<br />
Range<br />
10-50%<br />
After reaching<br />
50% the display<br />
changes to:<br />
INITIAL<br />
CURRENT<br />
100-400%.<br />
Note:<br />
The range of the<br />
INITIAL<br />
VOLTAGE can<br />
be extended to<br />
5-80% by using<br />
the EXTENDED<br />
SETTING as<br />
described in<br />
section 6.4.4<br />
page 42.<br />
Displays in MINIMIZED MODE and MAXIMIZED MODE<br />
Description<br />
Sets motor’s INITIAL STARTING VOLTAGE.<br />
The motor’s torque is directly proportional to the square of the<br />
voltage.<br />
This adjustment also determines the inrush current and<br />
mechanical shock. A setting that is too high may cause high<br />
initial mechanical shock and high inrush current. This can<br />
occur even if CURRENT LIMIT is set low because the INITIAL<br />
VOLTAGE setting overrides the CURRENT LIMIT setting.<br />
A setting that is too low may result in prolonged time until the<br />
motor starts to turn. In general, this setting should ensure that<br />
the motor starts turning immediately after start signal.<br />
CURRENT LIMIT<br />
400% OF FLA<br />
100-400%.<br />
Note:<br />
The range of the<br />
CURRENT<br />
LIMIT can be<br />
extended to<br />
100-700% by<br />
using the<br />
EXTENDED<br />
SETTING as<br />
described in<br />
section 6.4.4<br />
page 42.<br />
Note:<br />
When INITIAL VOLTAGE is set its maximum value, this<br />
displays changes to INITIAL CURRENT.<br />
When INITIAL CURRENT is set the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN causes current<br />
ramp instead of voltage ramp.<br />
Sets motor’s CURRENT LIMIT during starting.<br />
A setting that is too high will increase the current drawn from<br />
mains and faster acceleration.<br />
A setting that is too low may prevent the motor from<br />
completing acceleration process and reaching full speed. In<br />
general, this setting should be set to a value that is high<br />
enough to prevent stalling.<br />
Note:<br />
CURRENT LIMIT does not operate during RUN and SOFT<br />
STOP.<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
62 • Control Keypad<br />
START PARAMETERS<br />
- **** -<br />
Display and Default<br />
Values<br />
ACC. TIME<br />
10 SEC.<br />
Range<br />
1-30sec.<br />
Note:<br />
The range of the<br />
ACC. TIME can<br />
be extended to<br />
1-90 sec. by<br />
using the<br />
EXTENDED<br />
SETTING as<br />
described in<br />
section 6.4.4<br />
page 42.<br />
Displays in MINIMIZED MODE and MAXIMIZED MODE<br />
Description<br />
Sets ACCELERATION TIME of the motor.<br />
Determines the motor’s voltage ramp-up time, from initial to<br />
full voltage.<br />
It is recommended to set ACCELERATION TIME to the<br />
minimum acceptable value (approx. 5 sec).<br />
MAX. START TIME<br />
30 SEC.<br />
NUMBER OF STARTS<br />
1<br />
STARTS PERIOD<br />
20 MIN.<br />
1-30sec.<br />
Note:<br />
The range of the<br />
MAX. START<br />
TIME can be<br />
extended to<br />
1-250 sec. by<br />
using the<br />
EXTENDED<br />
SETTING as<br />
described in<br />
section 6.4.4<br />
page 42.<br />
Notes:<br />
• Since CURRENT LIMIT overrides ACC. TIME, when<br />
CURRENT LIMIT is set low, the starting time will be longer<br />
than the ACC. TIME setting.<br />
• When the motor reaches full speed before voltage reaches<br />
nominal, ACC. TIME setting is overridden, causing voltage<br />
to quickly ramp-up to nominal.<br />
• Using starting curves 2, 3, 4 prevents quick ramp up.<br />
Sets MAXIMUM START TIME.<br />
The maximum allowable start time, from the start signal to the<br />
end of the acceleration process. If voltage/speed does not<br />
reach nominal during MAX. START TIME then <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN will<br />
trip the motor and create a fault. The LCD will display the<br />
LONG START TIME fault message.<br />
For example, this can occur when the CURRENT LIMIT<br />
setting is too low.<br />
1-10/ OFF Sets NUMBER OF STARTS permitted during STARTS<br />
PERIOD.<br />
Limits the number of starts during the period of time defined<br />
by STARTS PERIOD.<br />
If you try to start even one more time within that period the<br />
START INHIBIT period will take effect.<br />
1–60min.<br />
Sets STARTS PERIOD during which NUMBER OF STARTS<br />
is being counted.<br />
START INHIBIT<br />
15 MIN<br />
1–60min.<br />
Sets START INHIBIT time which starting is disabled after TOO<br />
MANY STARTS trip.<br />
During the START INHIBIT period the WAIT BEFORE RST<br />
XX MIN message will be displayed.<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
63 • Control Keypad<br />
START PARAMETERS<br />
- **** -<br />
Display and Default<br />
Values<br />
RUN CONTACT DLY<br />
5 SEC.<br />
TURN BYPAS ON AT<br />
120 % OF FLA<br />
MIN TIME TO BYPS<br />
3 SEC.<br />
STORE ENABLE<br />
START PARAMETERS<br />
Range<br />
0-120sec.<br />
After reaching<br />
120 seconds,<br />
keep pressing for<br />
10 seconds the<br />
key and only<br />
if optional Relay<br />
PCB is installed<br />
the display<br />
changes to:<br />
TURN BYPASS<br />
ON AT<br />
120-300%.<br />
3-60sec.<br />
Displays in MINIMIZED MODE and MAXIMIZED MODE<br />
Description<br />
Sets time delay for End of Acceleration relay to close after<br />
completion of starting process.<br />
End of Acceleration relay can signal that motor is at its RUN<br />
position which can be used for motor loading.<br />
For information on TURN BYPAS ON AT and MIN TIME TO<br />
BYPS refer to section 7.8.3.2 on page 65.<br />
Same as STORE ENABLE MAIN & PROTECT page 57.<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
64 • Control Keypad<br />
7.8.3.1 Soft Start Parameters<br />
The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN incorporates five starting curves to enable you to select a suitable torque curve.<br />
SOFT START CURVE 1 – Standard curve (Default). This curve is the most suitable curve for preventing<br />
prolonged starting and motor overheating.<br />
SOFT START CURVE 2-4 - Pump Control - Induction motors produce peak torque of up to 3 times the rated<br />
torque towards the end of starting process. In some pump applications, this peak may cause pressure surge in<br />
the pipes.<br />
SOFT START CURVE 2, 3, 4 – During acceleration, before reaching peak torque, the Pump Control Program<br />
automatically controls the voltage ramp-up, thus, reducing peak torque.<br />
Choice of four pump control acceleration curves: 1!, 2!, 3!, 4!<br />
SOFT START CURVE 5 (TORQUE) – Torque Controlled acceleration - This provides a smooth timecontrolled<br />
torque ramp for the motor and the pump.<br />
Note:<br />
Always start with SOFT START CURVE 1. If towards the end of acceleration peak torque is too high (pressure<br />
is too high) proceed to Curve 2, 3, 4 or 5 in that order.<br />
SOFT START CURVE 0 – Basic curve. This curve uses less feedback signals. Use this curve if other curves<br />
do not give good results.<br />
WARNING!<br />
When operating in SOFT START CURVE 0 motor must be loaded, otherwise,<br />
vibration may occur towards the end of the soft start process.<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
65 • Control Keypad<br />
7.8.3.2 Special Control for Synchronous Motors Excitation<br />
The parameters TURN BYPAS ON AT and MIN TIME TO BYPS are used for special cases of synchronous<br />
motors excitation system.<br />
These parameters are active only under the following conditions:<br />
• Optional Relay PCB is installed<br />
• When setting the RUN CONTACT DLY parameter, after reaching 120 seconds (maximum value) and<br />
operator keeps pressing for additional 10 seconds the key.<br />
The parameter TURN BYPAS ON AT determines motor current below which the soft starter goes into Run<br />
condition and closes the End Of Acceleration relay.<br />
The parameter MIN TIME TO BYPS assures that Run condition can not be reached before the set time after<br />
the beginning of the starting process.<br />
This special feature is for synchronous motor starting applications where the motor current at asynchronous<br />
speed may be at higher level than regular asynchronous motor starting conditions.<br />
In this case the level of current at which the Run condition is being achieved can be programmed.<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
66 • Control Keypad<br />
7.8.4 Stop Parameters – Page 3<br />
STOP PARAMETERS<br />
- **** -<br />
Display and Default<br />
Values<br />
SOFT STOP CURVE<br />
1 (STANDARD)<br />
STOP TACHO. GAIN<br />
0(MIN. GAIN)<br />
DEC. TIME<br />
0 SEC.<br />
Range<br />
0 (BASIC)/<br />
1 (STANDARD)/<br />
2 !!/<br />
3 !!/<br />
4 !!/<br />
5 (TORQUE)/<br />
0 (MIN. GAIN)/<br />
1 !!/<br />
2 !!/<br />
3 !!/<br />
4 !!/<br />
5 !!/<br />
0–30sec.<br />
Note:<br />
The range of the<br />
DEC. TIME can<br />
be extended to<br />
0-90 sec. by<br />
using the<br />
EXTENDED<br />
SETTING as<br />
described in<br />
section 6.4.4<br />
page 42.<br />
Displays in MINIMIZED MODE and MAXIMIZED MODE<br />
(refer to section 6.4.1 page 40 for changing mode)<br />
Description<br />
Sets SOFT STOP CURVE.<br />
Refer to section 7.8.4.1 on page 66.<br />
1!! represents the 2nd level TACHO GAIN<br />
2!! represents the 3rd level TACHO GAIN…..<br />
5!! represents the 6th level TACHO GAIN.<br />
Notes:<br />
(1) This parameter will appear only if the optional PCB is<br />
installed and dip switch # 2 is set to on. Refer to section 6.4.2 on<br />
page 41 for dip switch setting details.<br />
(2) Tacho Feedback is operational in its basic form. Additional<br />
curves except for the basic linear curve are optional.<br />
(3) Consult the factory for the correct tacho selection and<br />
mechanical installation.<br />
Sets DECELERATION TIME of the motor.<br />
Used for controlled deceleration of high friction loads.<br />
Determines the motor’s voltage ramp down time.<br />
Note:<br />
The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN operates with a Bypass Contactor. The Bypass<br />
Contactor is controlled by the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN’s End of Acceleration<br />
relay. Upon soft stop initiation the End of Acceleration relay is<br />
de-energized, the load is transferred to the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN, and<br />
voltage begins ramping down.<br />
FINAL TORQUE<br />
0 (MIN.)<br />
0 (MIN.) – 10<br />
(MAX.)<br />
Sets FINAL TORQUE during soft stop.<br />
Determines torque towards the end of a soft stop.<br />
If the current still flows after speed is softly reduced to zero, you<br />
should increase the FINAL TORQUE setting.<br />
STORE ENABLE<br />
STOP PARAMETERS<br />
Same as STORE ENABLE MAIN & PROTECT page 57.<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
7.8.4.1 Soft Stop Parameters<br />
67 • Control Keypad<br />
SOFT STOP initiation opens the End of Acceleration contact and opens the Bypass Contactor. Load will be<br />
transferred to the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN thyristors and voltage begins to ramp down.<br />
The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN incorporates 5 stopping curves that enable you to select the suitable torque curve:<br />
SOFT STOP CURVE 1 – Standard Curve (Default) – voltage is linearly reduced from nominal to zero.<br />
The most stable and suitable curve for preventing prolonged stopping and motor overheating.<br />
SOFT STOP CURVE 2, 3, 4 Pump Control – In some pump applications, when pumping to higher elevation a<br />
considerable part of the torque is constant and does not decrease with speed.<br />
It may happen that during the deceleration process when voltage decreases the motor torque abruptly falls<br />
below load torque (instead of smoothly decreasing speed to zero), thus closing the valve and causing water<br />
hammer.<br />
Curves 2, 3 and 4 eliminate the water hammer phenomenon. In pump applications the load torque decreases<br />
in square relation to the speed, thus correcting control of voltage to reduce torque adequately and to smooth<br />
deceleration to a stop.<br />
Note:<br />
It is recommended that SOFT STOP CURVE 1 be used for all standard applications (not pumps).<br />
To reduce water hammer, select SOFT STOP CURVE 2, then 3, then 4 in that order.<br />
SOST STOP CURVE 5 - Torque Curve - Provides linear deceleration of the torque. In certain loads, linear<br />
torque deceleration can result in close to linear speed deceleration, thus eliminating stall conditions.<br />
Note:<br />
Always use SOFT STOP CURVE 1. If the motor stalls quickly instead of slowly decreasing its speed, select<br />
SOFT STOP CURVE 2, 3, 4 or 5 in that order until the problem is solved.<br />
SOFT STOP CURVE 0 – Basic curve. This curve uses less feedback signals. Use this curve if other curves do<br />
not give good results.<br />
WARNING!<br />
When operating in SOFT STOP CURVE 0 motor must be loaded, otherwise,<br />
vibration may occur during the beginning of the soft stop process.<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
68 • Control Keypad<br />
7.8.5 Dual Adjustment Parameters – Page 4<br />
DUAL ADJUSTMENT<br />
PARAMETERS<br />
Display and Default<br />
Values<br />
DA: INIT. VOLT.<br />
30%<br />
DA: INIT. CURRENT<br />
100%<br />
DA: CUR. LIMIT<br />
400% OF FLA<br />
DA: ACC. TIME<br />
10 SEC.<br />
DA: DEC. TIME<br />
0 SEC.<br />
DA: MOTOR FLA<br />
150 AMP.<br />
STORE ENABLE<br />
D. ADJ PARAMETERS<br />
Displays in MAXIMIZED MODE only<br />
(refer to section 6.4.1 page 40 for changing mode)<br />
Range<br />
Description<br />
10-50%<br />
After reaching 50% the<br />
display changes to:<br />
DA: INITIAL CURRENT<br />
100-400%.<br />
Note:<br />
The range of the DA:<br />
INITIAL VOLTAGE can be<br />
extended to<br />
10-80% by using the<br />
EXTENDED SETTING as<br />
described in section 6.4.4<br />
page 42.<br />
100-400%.<br />
Note:<br />
The range of the DA:<br />
CURRENT LIMIT can be<br />
extended to<br />
100-500% by using the<br />
EXTENDED SETTING as<br />
described in section 6.4.4<br />
page 42.<br />
1-30sec.<br />
Note:<br />
The range of the DA: ACC.<br />
TIME can be extended to<br />
1-90 sec. by using the<br />
EXTENDED SETTING as<br />
described in section 6.4.4<br />
page 42.<br />
0–30sec.<br />
Note:<br />
The range of the DA: DEC.<br />
TIME can be extended to<br />
0-90 sec. by using the<br />
EXTENDED SETTING as<br />
described in section 6.4.4<br />
Sets motor’s INITIAL STARTING VOLTAGE in DA<br />
mode. (Motor’s torque is directly proportional to the<br />
square of the voltage)<br />
Refer to section 7.8.3 on page 60 parameter:<br />
INITIAL VOLTAGE<br />
Sets motor’s highest current during starting in DA<br />
mode.<br />
Refer to section 7.8.3 on page 60 parameter:<br />
CURRENT LIMIT.<br />
Sets ACCELERATION TIME of the motor in DA<br />
mode.<br />
Refer to section 7.8.3 on page 60 parameter: ACC.<br />
TIME.<br />
Sets DECELERATION TIME of the motor in DA<br />
mode.<br />
Refer to section 7.8.4 on page 66 parameter: DEC.<br />
TIME.<br />
page 42.<br />
33-100% of STARTER FLC Sets motor’s FLA (Full load Ampere) in DA mode.<br />
Refer to section 7.8.2 on page 53 parameter:<br />
MOTOR FLA.<br />
Same as STORE ENABLE MAIN & PROTECT page<br />
57.<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
69 • Control Keypad<br />
7.8.6 Fault Parameters – Page 6<br />
FAULT PARAMETERS<br />
- **** -<br />
Display and Default Range<br />
Values<br />
UV & PL AUTO RST NO/YES<br />
NO<br />
UNDER CUR. RESET<br />
OFF<br />
BYPASS OPEN TRIP<br />
ENABLE<br />
TRIP AFTER BYPAS<br />
ENABLE<br />
10–120<br />
MIN./ OFF.<br />
ENABLE/<br />
DISABLE<br />
ENABLE/<br />
DISABLE<br />
Displays in MAXIMIZED MODE only<br />
(refer to section 6.4.1 page 40 for changing mode)<br />
Description<br />
Sets UNDERVOLTAGE and PHASE LOSS AUTO RESET.<br />
If UV & PL AUTO RST is set to NO then <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN will not<br />
automatically reset after an UNDER VOLTAGE or PHASE LOSS<br />
faults occur.<br />
If you set the UV & PL AUTO RST setting to YES then <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN<br />
will automatically reset.<br />
Notes:<br />
• Reset is performed only after the start signal is removed. To<br />
restart the motor recommence the start command.<br />
• Refer to section 7.8.2 on page 55 for details on setting of<br />
UNDERVOLT. TRIP.<br />
Sets UNDER CURRENT RESET time delay.<br />
If the UNDER CUR. RESET setting is OFF then <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN will not<br />
automatically reset after an UNDER CURRENT TRIP fault occurs.<br />
If you set the UNDER CUR. RESET setting to a time value then<br />
<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN will automatically reset with a delay (the time defined for<br />
UNDER CUR. RESET).<br />
If the start command is not removed, motor will restart<br />
automatically after the delay time.<br />
During the delay time a message U/C TRIP.RST IN: XX MIN. is<br />
displayed.<br />
Notes:<br />
• If the start command is not removed, motor will restart<br />
automatically after the delay time!!<br />
• Refer to section 7.8.2 on page 55 for details on setting of<br />
UNDER CURRENT TRIP.<br />
Sets BYPASS OPEN TRIP protection.<br />
Becomes operational when the Bypass Contactor does not close<br />
after EOA contact command the pilot ( interposing) relay to close.<br />
Set to ENABLE when motor current is running through the internal<br />
CTs.<br />
Set to DISABLE when motor current is not running through the<br />
internal CTs.<br />
Sets TRIP AFTER BYPASS trip.<br />
TRIP AFTER BYPASS can be set to DISABLE if motor is protected<br />
by an additional relay usually upstream to the soft starter.<br />
If during operation a fault occurs, Fault LED will flash and soft<br />
starter will display the fault but will not trip the motor until the soft<br />
starter is stopped.<br />
BY-PASS AUTO RST<br />
NO<br />
YES/ NO<br />
Sets BY-PASS AUTO RST reset.<br />
When TRIP AFTER BYPASS is DISABLE and if during operation a<br />
fault occurs, Fault LED will flash and soft starter will display the<br />
fault but will not trip the motor until the soft starter is stopped. In this<br />
case the soft starter will go to Trip position.<br />
If BY-PASS AUTO RESET is set to YES, the soft starter will be<br />
automatically reset the fault.<br />
Note: Reset is performed only after the start signal is removed. To<br />
restart the motor recommence the start command.<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
70 • Control Keypad<br />
FAULT PARAMETERS<br />
- **** -<br />
Display and Default<br />
Values<br />
SET CURVE 0 FLT<br />
ENABLE<br />
PWR ON & NO STRT<br />
ENABLE<br />
INSULATION ALARM<br />
OFF<br />
INSULATION TRIP<br />
OFF<br />
PHASE SEQUENCE<br />
POSITIVE<br />
Range<br />
ENABLE/<br />
DISABLE<br />
ENABLE/<br />
DISABLE<br />
OFF/ 0.2–<br />
20Mohm<br />
OFF/ 0.2–<br />
20Mohm<br />
POSITIVE/<br />
NEGATIVE/<br />
IGNORE<br />
Displays in MAXIMIZED MODE only<br />
(refer to section 6.4.1 page 40 for changing mode)<br />
Description<br />
SET CURVE TO 0 message may occur seldom during starting with<br />
special conditions of mains and load. Change start (and stop, if<br />
used) curve to SOFT START CURVE 0 and SOFT STOP CURVE<br />
0.<br />
Set SET CURVE 0 FLT to DISABLE, only if SET CURVE TO 0 FLT<br />
fault occurs during starting and if SOFT START CURVE 0 is not<br />
good enough for the application.<br />
When set to DISABLE verify that motor starts normally in the<br />
selected curve.<br />
Sets POWER ON & NO STRT trip<br />
POWER ON & NO START is operational upon mains voltage<br />
connection. It trips the motor when mains voltage is connected to<br />
the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN for more than 30 seconds without a start signal.<br />
Set to DISABLE only in special occurrences. (Consult factory!)<br />
Sets INSULATION ALARM level.<br />
Activates INSULATION ALARM trip.<br />
Applicable only if optional insulation PCB and resistor unit are<br />
installed and connected.<br />
Insulation testing is enabled only when motor is not running and<br />
after 60 seconds in the Stop state.<br />
While motor is running the value of the insulation resistance shown<br />
in the display is the last measured value prior to starting of the<br />
motor. While testing, if the insulation level drops below Alarm level -<br />
a message: MOTOR INSULATION ALARM will display and the<br />
insulation alarm relay will be energized. The Fault LED on the<br />
control keypad of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN will blink.<br />
If insulation level will return to normal for more than 60 seconds the<br />
alarm will automatically reset.<br />
While testing, if the insulation level drops below Fault level - a<br />
message: INSULATION TRIP will display and the fault relay of the<br />
<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN will go to the fault position (as programmed in the I/O<br />
PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS).<br />
The Fault LED on the front of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN will light. In this status<br />
motor can not be started.<br />
If insulation level will return to normal the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN will not<br />
automatically reset.<br />
Sets PHASE SEQUENCE protection of the soft starter.<br />
Allows to start the motor in POSITIVE sequence of the mains OR in<br />
the NEGATIVE sequence of the mains or, when set to IGNORE, in<br />
both sequences.<br />
STORE ENABLE<br />
FAULT PARAMETERS<br />
Same as STORE ENABLE MAIN & PROTECT page 57.<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
71 • Control Keypad<br />
7.8.7 I/O Programming Parameters – Page 7<br />
I/O PROGRAMMING<br />
PARAMETERS<br />
Display and Default<br />
Values<br />
PROG. INPUT # 7<br />
RESET<br />
PROG. INPUT # 8<br />
DUAL ADJUSTMENT<br />
Displays in MAXIMIZED MODE only<br />
(refer to section 6.4.1 page 40 for changing mode)<br />
Range<br />
Description<br />
RESET/<br />
TEST/ MULTI SOFT<br />
STOP (optional)<br />
DUAL ADJUSTMENT/<br />
RESET<br />
Sets terminal 7 function<br />
Refer to section 7.8.7.1 on page 72.<br />
Sets terminal 8 function<br />
Refer to section 7.8.7.1 on page 72.<br />
FAULT RELAY TYPE<br />
FAULT<br />
IMM/ # STRT PREAL<br />
IMMEDIATE<br />
RELAY ON DELAY<br />
0 SEC.<br />
FAULT/<br />
FAULT – FAIL SAFE<br />
IMMEDIATE/<br />
# STRTS PREALARM<br />
0 – 3600SEC.<br />
Sets FAULT RELAY mode of operation.<br />
When configured to FAULT the internal relay is<br />
energized upon fault.<br />
When configured to FAULT FAIL SAFE the relay is<br />
de-energized upon fault. In this mode, while normal<br />
operation, the contacts are open.<br />
Relay will also de-energize upon control power<br />
outage.<br />
Sets IMM/ # STRT PREAL mode of operation.<br />
When configured to IMMEDIATE the relay is energizes<br />
at the start signal after the programmed RELAY ON<br />
DELAY time has elapsed. It de-energizes at the end of<br />
the deceleration time (if any) after the programmed<br />
RELAY OFF DELAY time has elapsed.<br />
When configured to # STRTS PREALARM the relay is<br />
energized if a start command will cause the soft<br />
starter to trip on TOO MANY STARTS.<br />
Sets IMM/ # STRT PREAL on delay time.<br />
Sets IMM/ # STRT PREAL off delay time<br />
RELAY OFF DELAY<br />
0 SEC.<br />
0 – 3600SEC.<br />
ANALOG OUTPUT<br />
RELATIVE CURRENT<br />
STORE ENABLE<br />
I/O PROG. PARAM.<br />
RELATIVE<br />
CURRENT/<br />
RELATIVE POWER<br />
When set to RELATIVE CURRENT the full scale of the<br />
optional analog PCB output is related to 200% of FLA<br />
(2x< Motor rated current>).<br />
Or, when set to RELATIVE POWER the full scale of<br />
the analog PCB output is related to 100% of motor<br />
power (1x< Motor rated power>).<br />
Motor rated power is set in the MAIN & PROTECT<br />
parameter. Refer to section 7.8.2 page 55.<br />
Same as STORE ENABLE MAIN & PROTECT page<br />
57.<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
72 • Control Keypad<br />
7.8.7.1 Terminal 7 and 8 Programming<br />
Input Terminal 7<br />
Programmed Function<br />
RESET (default setting)<br />
TEST<br />
MULTI SOFT STOP<br />
(Optional – only if optional<br />
software is installed)<br />
Input Terminal 8<br />
Programmed Function<br />
DUAL ADJUSTMENT<br />
(default setting)<br />
RESET<br />
Description<br />
Input terminal 7 is used as RESET to reset all <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN faults.<br />
The RESET command will take effect only if the start command is removed<br />
(except for UNDER CURRENT fault)<br />
While input terminal 7 is on firing test can be done.<br />
Refer to section 14.3 on page 117 for firing test procedure.<br />
While input terminal 7 is on, the soft starter will go to Run even if current is not<br />
running through the soft starter. This will enable Multi Soft Stop operation with the<br />
<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN.<br />
Description<br />
Input terminal 8 is used to start and stop from the DUAL ADJUSTMENT<br />
PARAMETERS page. Refer to section 7.8.5 on page 68 for programming. Refer<br />
to section 5.9 on page 34 for wiring.<br />
Input terminal 8 is used as RESET to reset all <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN faults.<br />
The RESET command will take affect only if the start command is removed.<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
73 • Control Keypad<br />
7.8.8 Comm. Parameters – Page 8 – With the Modbus Card<br />
COMM.PARAMETERS<br />
- **** -<br />
Display and Default<br />
Values<br />
COMM. PROTOCOL<br />
MODBUS<br />
Range<br />
MODBUS<br />
Displays in MAXIMIZED MODE only<br />
(refer to section 6.4.1 page 40 for changing mode)<br />
Description<br />
Sets <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN’s communication PROTOCOL.<br />
Operational when the optional communication PCB is installed.<br />
BAUD RATE<br />
9600 (MODBUS)<br />
PARITY CHECK<br />
EVEN<br />
SERIAL LINK NO.<br />
OFF<br />
S. LINK PAR. SAVE<br />
DISABLE<br />
SER. LINK CONTROL<br />
DISABLE<br />
FRONT COM ADDRES<br />
OFF<br />
1200, 2400,<br />
4800, 9600<br />
EVEN, ODD,<br />
NO<br />
OFF,1 – 247<br />
ENABLE/<br />
DISABLE<br />
ENABLE/<br />
DISABLE<br />
OFF,1 – 247<br />
Sets <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN’s BAUD RATE.<br />
Sets <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN’s communication PARITY CHECK.<br />
Sets <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN’s communication SERIAL LINK NO.<br />
Enables parameters modification via serial communication<br />
Enables start, stop, reset etc… via serial communication<br />
Future enhancement<br />
STORE ENABLE<br />
COMM. PARAMETERS<br />
Notes:<br />
(1) Same as STORE ENABLE MAIN & PROTECT page 57.<br />
(2) After changing communication parameters and storing them, control power<br />
must be switched off and on to load new communication parameters.<br />
7.8.9 Comm. Parameters – Page 8 – With the Profibus Card<br />
COMM.PARAMETERS<br />
- **** -<br />
Displays in MAXIMIZED MODE only<br />
(refer to section 6.4.1 page 40 for changing mode)<br />
Display and Default Range<br />
Description<br />
Values<br />
COMM. PROTOCOL<br />
PROFIBUS<br />
PROFIBUS/<br />
MODBUS<br />
Sets <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN’s communication protocol.<br />
Operational when the optional communication PCB is installed.<br />
BAUD RATE<br />
AUTO (PROFIBUS)<br />
User can not change BAUD RATE value.<br />
Max. rate is 12 mega bit per second (MBPS).<br />
PROFI.NETWORK ID<br />
OFF<br />
OFF, 1-126<br />
Sets the Profibus network ID.<br />
When set to OFF the Profibus PCB will not function.<br />
S. LINK PAR. SAVE<br />
DISABLE<br />
SER. LINK CONTROL<br />
DISABLE<br />
FRONT COM ADDRES<br />
OFF<br />
STORE ENABLE<br />
COMM. PARAMETERS<br />
ENABLE/<br />
DISABLE<br />
ENABLE/<br />
DISABLE<br />
OFF,1 – 247<br />
Enables parameter modification via serial communication<br />
Enables start, stop, reset etc… via serial communication<br />
Future enhancement<br />
Notes:<br />
(1) Same as STORE ENABLE MAIN & PROTECT page 57.<br />
(2) After changing communication parameters and storing them, control power<br />
must be switched off and on to load new communication parameters.<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
74 • Control Keypad<br />
7.8.10 Statistical Data – page 9<br />
STATISTICAL DATA<br />
- **** -<br />
Display and Default<br />
Values<br />
T SINCE LST STRT<br />
NO DATA<br />
LAST STRT PERIOD<br />
NO DATA<br />
LAST START MAX I<br />
NO DATA<br />
TOTAL RUN TIME<br />
0 HOURS<br />
TOTAL # OF START<br />
0<br />
TOTAL ENERGY<br />
0 KWH<br />
TOTAL R. ENERGY<br />
0 KVARH<br />
LAST TRIP<br />
NO DATA<br />
TRIP CURRENT<br />
0 % OF FLA<br />
TOTAL # OF TRIPS<br />
0<br />
LAST 10 TRIPS:<br />
hh.mm mm.dd.yy<br />
Range<br />
Displays in MINIMIZED MODE and MAXIMIZED MODE<br />
Description<br />
Displays time since last start in minutes.<br />
Displays last starting time in seconds.<br />
Starting time is the duration until motor current drops to<br />
nominal.<br />
Displays last starting maximum starting current.<br />
Displays the motor’s total run time.<br />
Displays the total number of starts.<br />
Displays motor kWH consumption.<br />
Displays motor kVARH consumption.<br />
Displays the cause of the motor’s last trip.<br />
Displays motor current when the motor was tripped by the<br />
<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN.<br />
Displays the total number of trips.<br />
Displays motor trip history.<br />
PREVIOUS TRIP -1<br />
hh.mm mm.dd.yy<br />
PREVIOUS TRIP -2<br />
hh.mm mm.dd.yy<br />
.<br />
.<br />
.<br />
.<br />
NO DATA<br />
NO DATA<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
8. MOTOR AND SOFT STARTER PROTECTION<br />
75 • Motor and Soft Starter Protection<br />
Protection functions are distinguished between adjustable protection functions and non-adjustable protection<br />
functions.<br />
Upon fault – motor stops, Fault LED lights and Fault Relay chances position.<br />
The LCD shows TRIP: < fault description>. (for example: TRIP: UNDER CURRENT).<br />
WARNING!<br />
Upon any fault read carefully the COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION<br />
chapters in this <strong>manual</strong> before you try to identify the cause.<br />
8.1 Adjustable Protection Functions<br />
8.1.1 UNDER CURRENT<br />
Trips the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN when line current drops below the preset level for the preset time.<br />
Check UNDERCURR. TRIP and UNDERCURR. DELAY settings; check line currents through L1, L2, L3.<br />
For protection parameter settings refer to section 7.8.2 page 55.<br />
8.1.2 O/C –SHEAR PIN<br />
Trips the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN when:<br />
• Instantaneously when current exceeds 850% of <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN FLC<br />
• While starting when current exceeds 850% of Motor FLA<br />
• While running when current exceeds 100-850% of Motor FLA with a programmable delay of 0-5 seconds.<br />
Delay is overridden when current reaches 850% of <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN FLC.<br />
Check that the motor is not stalled or jammed.<br />
Check FLA, FLC settings.<br />
Check motor and cable connections.<br />
Perform a “Megger” test to check the condition of the motor and cables.<br />
For protection parameter settings refer to section 7.8.2 page 55.<br />
8.1.3 OVERLOAD<br />
Trips the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN when current exceeds the OVERLOAD TRIP level and the thermal register has filled up.<br />
Check FLA, FLC and overload settings and check motor current, then wait at least 15 minutes to let the motor<br />
and <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN cool down before restarting.<br />
You may want to check motor THERMAL CAPACITY as displayed in the data page refer to section 7.8.1<br />
page 54.<br />
For protection parameter settings refer to section 7.8.2 page 55.<br />
8.1.4 UNBALANCE CURRENT<br />
Current Unbalance is the difference between the maximum and minimum values of the motor’s three line<br />
currents divided by the motor’s maximum current or motor FLA, whichever is greater. A fault occurs when the<br />
actual Unbalance is greater than the setpoint for a delay that exceeds the UNBALANCE DELAY.<br />
For protection parameter settings refer to section 7.8.2 page 55.<br />
8.1.5 GROUND FAULT<br />
Trips the motor when Ground Current exceeds the preset GND FAULT TRIP for more than<br />
GND FAULT DLY.<br />
Check motor and cable connections.<br />
Perform a “Megger” test to verify motor and cables condition.<br />
For protection parameter settings refer to section 7.8.2 page 55.<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
76 • Motor and Soft Starter Protection<br />
8.1.6 UNDER/NO VOLTAGE<br />
Trips the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN when line voltage drops below the preset level for the preset time.<br />
When voltage drops to zero, the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN trips immediately with no delay.<br />
Check UNDERVOLT. TRIP and UNDERVOLT. DELAY settings, check line voltages on L1, L2, L3.<br />
For protection parameter settings refer to section 7.8.2 page 55.<br />
8.1.7 OVER VOLTAGE<br />
Trips the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN when line voltage increases above the preset level for the preset time.<br />
Check OVERVOLT. TRIP and OVERVOLT. DELAY settings, check line voltages on L1, L2, L3.<br />
For protection parameter settings refer to section 7.8.2 page 55.<br />
8.1.8 LONG START TIME<br />
Trips the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN if output voltage does not reach nominal at the preset MAX. START TIME.<br />
Check FLA, FLC and MAX. START TIME settings. Increase INITIAL VOLTAGE, CURRENT LIMIT & MAX.<br />
START TIME or decrease ACC. TIME as necessary.<br />
For parameter settings refer to section 7.8.3 page 60.<br />
8.1.9 OPEN BYPASS<br />
Operates when the Bypass Contactor does not close after the EOA contact of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN closes.<br />
Note: This protection can be disabled by setting BY PASS OPEN TRIP to DISABLE when the Bypass is<br />
connected in a separate cabinet, in a configuration where the starter CTs do not measure motor current while<br />
the Bypass Contactor is closed.<br />
For parameter settings refer to section 7.8.6 page 69.<br />
8.1.10 SET CURVE TO 0<br />
Trip occurs if the Soft Starter starts with a non-adequate starting curve to the network.<br />
Change start and stop parameter to SOFT START CURVE 0 and try again.<br />
For parameter settings refer to section 7.8.3 page 60.<br />
8.1.11 PWR ON & NO STRT<br />
Operates upon main voltage connection and activated while mains voltage is connected to the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN for<br />
more than 30 seconds without a start signal.<br />
Note: This protection can be disabled by setting PWR ON & NO STRT to DISABLE. Do not set to DISABLE<br />
before you consult the factory!<br />
Reset the fault, and initiate the start command within less than 30 seconds after mains voltage is applied to<br />
L1, L2 and L3.<br />
8.1.12 MOTOR INSULATION<br />
(Optional) Trips the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN when the motor insulation level decreases below the trip level set.<br />
Check motor and cable insulation level.<br />
For INSULATION ALARM/TRIP protection settings refer to section 7.8.6 page 69.<br />
8.1.13 PHASE SEQUENCE<br />
Trips the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN if line phase sequence is wrong.<br />
The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN can be operated in any phase sequence as set in the PHASE SEQUENCE protection of the<br />
soft starter.<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
77 • Motor and Soft Starter Protection<br />
It allows the motor to start in the POSITIVE sequence of the mains OR in the NEGATIVE sequence of the<br />
mains or, when set to IGNORE both sequences.<br />
For PHASE SEQUANCE protection settings refer to section 7.8.6 page 69.<br />
8.1.14 TOO MANY STARTS<br />
Trips the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN if NUMBER OF STARTS during START PERIOD exceeds the preset number.<br />
You must wait until the motor and the starter cool down according to the START INHIBIT setting.<br />
For protection settings refer to section 7.8.3 page 60.<br />
8.2 Non Adjustable Protection Functions<br />
8.2.1 UNDER/OVER FREQUENCY<br />
Trips the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN if frequency is not in the range of 44-65Hz<br />
Check that frequency variations are between 44-65Hz.<br />
8.2.2 PHASE LOSS<br />
Trips the starter if 1 or 2 phases are missing.<br />
Check lines voltages and correct connection.<br />
8.2.3 WRONG PARAMETERS<br />
After power up parameters not transferred from RAM to EEPROM or vice versa.<br />
Press Reset then load DEFAULT PARAMETERS. Refer to section 7.6.3 page 49 for more details on loading<br />
default parameters.Note that obtaining DEFAULT PARAMETERS erases all previously modified settings and<br />
requires the operator to reprogram all parameters that differ from the factory default.<br />
Note:<br />
It is especially important to reprogram the RATED LINE VOLTAGE and STARTER FLC (as shown on the<br />
label of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN) and all other parameters in the MAIN & PROTECT mod page. Refer to section 7.8.2<br />
page 55.<br />
8.2.4 STORAGE ERROR<br />
When trying to store parameters at the end of a mode page or after lading DEFAULT PRAMETERS.<br />
Press Reset and try again. If this does not succeed load DEFAULT PARAMETERS. Refer to section 7.6.3<br />
page 49 for more details on loading default parameters.<br />
Note that obtaining DEFAULT PARAMETERS erases all previously modified settings and requires the<br />
operator to reprogram all parameters that differ from the factory default.<br />
Note: It is especially important to reprogram the RATED LINE VOLTAGE and STARTER FLC (as shown on<br />
the label of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN) and all other parameters in MAIN & PROTECT mod page. Refer to section 7.8.2<br />
page 55.<br />
8.2.5 S. SCR OR WR. CON<br />
Operational after start signal. Trips if the motor is not properly connected to <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN’s load terminals, when:<br />
• Internal disconnection is detected in the motor winding<br />
• One or more of the SCRs have been shorted.<br />
• Incorrect fiber optic leads connection<br />
This protection is not active when SOFT START CURVE 0 is selected.<br />
Check with an ohmmeter between L1-U, L2-V, L3-W; resistances are listed on section 14.1 page 116.<br />
Check for no voltage on terminals U, V, W (from parallel system or an independent bypass).<br />
SCRs may fail due to:<br />
• High short current not protected by proper fuses.<br />
• High voltage spikes not protected by proper external Varistors.<br />
• Frequent starting at maximum conditions or fault conditions.<br />
For SOFT START CURVE 0 setting refer to section 7.8.2 page 55.<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
78 • Motor and Soft Starter Protection<br />
8.2.6 OVER TEMPERATURE<br />
Thermal sensors are mounted on the heat-sinks of the Power Section and trip the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN when the<br />
temperature rises above 85ºC.<br />
WARNING!<br />
The over temperature protection is designed to operate under normal<br />
conditions, e.g., in the event of extended low overload, insufficient ventilation<br />
due to fan stoppage or air flow blockage.<br />
Incorrect <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN selection, frequent starting at max. conditions, or repeated<br />
starting under fault conditions can cause the SCR to overheat and fail before<br />
the heat-sink reaches 85°C thereby causing the thermal sensors to trip the<br />
<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN.<br />
8.2.7 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 & EXTERNAL FAULT 2<br />
External Faults becomes operational when <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN is energized.<br />
The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN will trip if contact between terminals 19 and 21 closes for more than 2 sec.<br />
8.3 Fault and Reset<br />
When any of the above protections trip (except INSULATION ALARM), the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN locks in a fault condition<br />
thus disabling firing of the thyristors. Fault LED lights, fault description is displayed on the LCD and the fault<br />
relay operates.<br />
• For local reset, after fault has been removed, press Reset key.<br />
• Remote reset can be performed through terminals 7 or 8 (see I/O PROGRAMMING section 7.8.7<br />
page 71).<br />
When a fault occurs, followed by a voltage outage, the fault condition is latched and reappears upon voltage<br />
restoration.<br />
Note:<br />
Reset (Local, Remote, Serial Link or Auto Reset) is not possible as long as the START signal exists, except<br />
for UNDER CURRENT trip.<br />
8.4 Auto Reset<br />
UNDER VOLTAGE and PHASE LOSS faults can auto-reset (refer to section 7.8.6 on page 69). The <strong>HRVS</strong>-<br />
DN will reset itself 60 seconds after voltage was fully restored, provided that the START signal is removed.<br />
UNDER CURRENT fault can be set to auto-reset (refer to section 7.8.6 on page 69).<br />
The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN will reset itself when a programmed time delay has elapsed even if the START signal is not<br />
removed!<br />
MOTOR INSULATION ALARM auto-resets if the resistance exceeds the INSULATION ALARM level (refer to<br />
section 7.8.6 on page 69).<br />
WARNING!<br />
Auto Reset explained here above corresponds to the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN IP00 unit<br />
(OEM Kit).<br />
It is customer responsibility to avoid any dangerous conditions when the<br />
<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN IP00 is installed in a medium voltage cabinet.<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
79 • Motor and Soft Starter Protection<br />
8.5 Timing Occurrence Table<br />
Timing And Occurrence<br />
Too many starts with START INHIBIT period<br />
Active During<br />
Start Run Stop<br />
√<br />
Soft<br />
Stop<br />
Electronic overload with curve selection √ (1) √ (1)<br />
O/C shear pin (jam)<br />
<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN protection – trip immediately at I≥850% FLC in less<br />
than 1 cycle.<br />
Motor protection – trip function<br />
√ √ √<br />
During start – factory set at 850% FLA after O/C DELAY. √ √<br />
During run – adjustable 100 – 850% FLA after O/C DELAY.<br />
Under current adjustable time delay<br />
√<br />
√<br />
Unbalance current adjustable time delay √ √ √<br />
Ground fault current adjustable time delay<br />
√<br />
Phase loss √ √ √<br />
Phase sequence √ √ √<br />
Under voltage with adjustable time delay. Time delay is<br />
override in case of PHASE LOSS.<br />
√ √ √<br />
Over voltage with adjustable time delay √ √ √<br />
Long start time (stall protection)<br />
√<br />
Shorted SCR or Wrong Connection √ √<br />
External fault 1 & 2– input from a N.O. contact √ √ √ √<br />
SCR protection by Metal Oxide Varistors (MOV) √ √ √ √<br />
<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Power Section over-temperature √ √<br />
<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN internal test, when the On LED is lit. √ √ √ √<br />
Motor insulation test (optional) – Two levels for alarm &<br />
trip. When installed, operates when mains voltage is<br />
√<br />
removed.<br />
Power ON and no Start<br />
√<br />
Bypass open trip<br />
√<br />
Set curve to 0<br />
√<br />
Notes:<br />
(1) Electronic OVERLOAD can be set to operate at all times, during Run or it can be disabled.<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
80 • Packing, Storage, Handling and Assembly<br />
9. PACKING, STORAGE, HANDLING AND ASSEMBLY<br />
Note!<br />
This section only refers to standard cabinet!<br />
For other than standard cabinet design refer to the supplied drawings and/or<br />
consult the factory.<br />
9.1 Packing Specification<br />
Equipment is packed and covered and placed on the case base of the crate.<br />
Crate side walls 8mm thick playwood and 20x90mm beams<br />
Crate is closed by pins and metal band<br />
Crate is marked by international marks<br />
Wood is marked in according to ISPM 15<br />
9.2 Storage<br />
The soft starter is designed for indoor use and must not be left outdoors.<br />
Soft starter should be stored in a warm, dry room and protected against dust and debris.<br />
If the soft starter is to be kept in store before use make sure that the ambient conditions are acceptable:<br />
Storing temperature: -20…..+70°C<br />
Relative humidity:<br />
81 • Packing, Storage, Handling and Assembly<br />
Figure 24 – Cabinet Lifting Using 4 Lifting Cables. Top angle, A, Should be ≤60°<br />
9.4 Soft starter’s Assembly Procedure:<br />
Assembly procedure comprised of:<br />
Mechanical assembly & Power and Control cables connection<br />
When assembling the cabinet the following torque table should be applied for the mechanical and electrical<br />
bolts closing:<br />
Bolt size<br />
M4<br />
M5<br />
M6<br />
M8<br />
M10<br />
M12<br />
M16<br />
Torque<br />
1.5Nm<br />
2.5Nm<br />
4.5Nm<br />
1`0Nm<br />
20Nm<br />
40Nm<br />
80Nm<br />
9.4.1 Mechanical Assembly<br />
Four 22mm diameter holes located at the bottom frame of the cabinet as indicated in the Figure 25.<br />
Mount the cabinet in place and anchor it with 4 bolts.<br />
Figure 25 – Anchor Bolts Holes Location on the Base of the Cabinet at Level 0mm.<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
82 • Packing, Storage, Handling and Assembly<br />
9.4.2 Power and Control Cable Connections<br />
9.4.3 Power Cables Connection<br />
Figure 26 – Power and Control Cables Penetration to the Cabinet at Level 75mm<br />
Figure 27 – Power Cables Connection and Control Cables Routing.<br />
Note!<br />
For low voltage test it is advised to leave motor terminals open to enable easy<br />
connection of the low voltage motor.<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
83 • Commissioning and Operation Manual<br />
10. COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION MANUAL<br />
WARNING!<br />
Safety<br />
Precautions!<br />
The information in this <strong>manual</strong> does not purport to cover all details or variations in<br />
equipment, nor to provide for every possible contingency to be met in connection<br />
with installation, operation or maintenance.<br />
Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise which<br />
are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser's purposes, please contact your local<br />
Solcon office.<br />
Further, the contents of this Manual shall neither become a part of nor modify any<br />
prior or existing agreement, commitment or relationship. The sales contract<br />
contains the entire obligation of Solcon. The warranty contained in the contract<br />
between the parties is the sole warranty of Solcon. Any statements contained<br />
herein do not create new warranties nor modify the existing warranty.<br />
• Read this <strong>manual</strong> carefully before operating the equipment and follow its<br />
instructions.<br />
• Installation, operation and maintenance should be in strict accordance with<br />
this <strong>manual</strong>, national codes and good practice. Installation or operation not<br />
performed in strict accordance with these instructions will avoid<br />
manufacturer’s warranty.<br />
• Never open the medium voltage doors of the cabinet while medium<br />
voltage is connected to the cabinet.<br />
• Do not open the medium voltage doors, even if the motor is not running<br />
and the Line Contactor is open. Medium voltage may still be connected to<br />
the cabinet (upstream the contactor)!<br />
• Ensure, before opening the medium voltage doors, that the input medium<br />
voltage lines are disconnected from mains and grounded.<br />
• It is absolutely forbidden to change the position of the internal selector<br />
switches while Line Contactor is closed.<br />
• Before closing the doors for medium voltage operation, ensure that the low<br />
voltage Test Harness is not connected. The Test Harness is only used for<br />
the low voltage test. As a rule, always disconnect the harness immediately<br />
after ending the low voltage test. It should be mounted inside small plastic<br />
bag in the drawing pocket. This Test Harness is equipped with long tape,<br />
intended to prevent forgetting it connected. Never cut this warning tape.<br />
Leave open for its full length and laid in such a way that the harness will<br />
not be forgotten connected after the low voltage test.<br />
• The Line Contactor is not designed for disconnecting high short circuit<br />
currents. Therefore the trip relay terminals 39-40-41 must be used to open<br />
the upstream breaker. Alternatively, upstream fuses can be used.<br />
• The software of the external PLC (if used) controlling the starter must<br />
check the status of the trip relay in customer terminals 39-40-41. Upon<br />
detecting a trip signal, the PLC should open the Remote Start / Stop<br />
contact (connected to customer terminals 15-16) immediately.<br />
10.1 Operational notes<br />
• The seven Logic Inputs of the Control Module (terminals 4-5-6-7-8-9 & 19-20-21) are high impedance<br />
inputs. Add an auxiliary relay for each Logic Input connected through long wire to a remote location<br />
outside the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN cabinet.<br />
• Do not connect power factor correction capacitors in parallel with the motor at the output side of the soft<br />
starter. It may cause an immediate damage to the starter and/or capacitors and can be dangerous.<br />
• Do not use power factor capacitors at all if the starter is powered from a generator. The capacitors may<br />
interfere with the voltage regulator of the generator. They may cause significant dangerous over voltages.<br />
• If there are power factor capacitors connected upstream of the starter, and they are mounted close to the<br />
starter, it is recommended to disconnect the capacitors until the end of commissioning.<br />
• Perform a Megger test to the motor and its cables while disconnected from the cabinet. After the end of<br />
test, leave the cable unconnected to enable the low voltage test.<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
84 • Commissioning and Operation Manual<br />
Warning!<br />
• Internal components and PCBs are connected to high potential when the starter’s cabinet is connected<br />
to mains voltage.<br />
• Never connect medium voltage to the cabinet, while any of the medium voltage doors is open.<br />
• This high voltage is extremely dangerous and causes death or severe injury if contacted.<br />
• Unit must be grounded to ensure correct operation, safety and to prevent damage.<br />
• This medium voltage unit must be tested and operated only by authorized and licensed personnel.<br />
10.2 Parts Identification in the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Cabinet<br />
This section describe the standard cabinet comprising of: input bus bars, Line Contactor, Power Section,<br />
Bypass Contactor, low voltage compartment and output bus bars.<br />
10.2.1 Parts Identification in the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Cabinet (<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV)<br />
Figure 28 – <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV Standard Cabinet – One Line Diagram<br />
The standard cabinet includes one frame with three doors. One of the doors is a medium voltage door and two<br />
doors are for low voltage: low voltage compartment door and the customer terminals compartment door.<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
85 • Commissioning and Operation Manual<br />
Warning!<br />
You are only allowed to open the low voltage compartment door and customer terminal compartment door<br />
when medium voltage is connected to the cabinet!<br />
It is strictly forbidden to open the medium voltage compartment door at any time when medium voltage is<br />
connected to the cabinet!<br />
Figure 29 - <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV Standard<br />
Cabinet – Doors Closed<br />
Figure 30 - <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV Standard Cabinet –<br />
Doors Open<br />
View with medium voltage door open and customer terminals compartment door:<br />
• Customer terminals are located in a dedicated compartment on the top of the cabinet.<br />
• Line Contactor is mounted on the top of the medium voltage compartment.<br />
• The EPT-Tx (Electronic Potential Transformer Transmitter) is mounted on the medium voltage bus<br />
bars downstream the Line Contactor on the input to the Power Section of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN thus<br />
measuring the input voltage to the Power Section.<br />
The output of the EPT-Tx are two fiber optic wires running to the EPT-Rx (Electronic Potential<br />
Transformer Receiver) which is located in the low voltage compartment.<br />
The harness runs out of the Power Section to the low voltage compartment. This harness includes<br />
both fiber optic wires and copper wires.<br />
• The main unit is the Power Section of the soft starter.<br />
Note that this Power Section is actually composed of three identical modules, one per phase.<br />
The input bus bars to the Power Section are on top of it marked L1,L2, L3.<br />
Two sets of three bus bars each are mounted at the bottom of the Power Section:<br />
o One set, marked L1B,L2B,L3B, is connected to the input bus bars of the Power Section. These<br />
bus bars are brought to the bottom of the Power Section to enable convenient connection of the<br />
Bypass Contactor.<br />
o Second set, marked U,V,W, is the output bas bars.<br />
• At the bottom of the cabinet the Bypass Contactor is located.<br />
• Verify on cabinet label that both, medium voltage and control voltage, are according to the supplied<br />
mains voltage and control voltage.<br />
• Input bus bars and output bus bars are located at the bottom of the cabinet.<br />
The input bus bars are at the back of the lower part of the cabinet.<br />
The output bus bars are at the front of the lower part of the cabinet.<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
86 • Commissioning and Operation Manual<br />
10.2.2 Parts Identification in the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Cabinet (<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN from 10kV and up)<br />
Figure 31 – <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN from 10kV and up, Standard Cabinet – One Line Diagram<br />
The standard cabinet includes three frames with nine doors. Four of the doors are medium voltage doors and<br />
five doors are for low voltage: low voltage compartment door and customer terminals compartment doors.<br />
Note:<br />
You are only allowed to open the low voltage compartment door and customer terminal compartments doors<br />
when medium voltage is connected to the cabinet!<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
87 • Commissioning and Operation Manual<br />
It is strictly forbidden to open the medium voltage compartment door at any time when medium voltage is<br />
connected to the cabinet!<br />
Figure 32 - <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN from 10kV and up Standard Cabinet – Doors Closed<br />
Figure 33 - <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN from 10kV and up Standard Cabinet – Doors Open<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
88 • Commissioning and Operation Manual<br />
View with medium voltage doors open and customer terminals compartment doors open:<br />
• Customer terminals are located in a dedicated compartments on the top of the cabinet.<br />
• Line Contactor is mounted on the left medium voltage compartment.<br />
• The EPT-Tx (Electronic Potential Transformer Transmitter) is mounted on the medium voltage bus<br />
bars downstream the Line Contactor on the input to the Power Section of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN thus<br />
measuring the input voltage to the Power Section.<br />
The output of the EPT-Tx are two fiber optic wires running to the EPT-Rx (Electronic Potential<br />
Transformer Receiver) which is located in the low voltage compartment.<br />
The harness runs out of the Power Section to the low voltage compartment. This harness includes<br />
both fiber optic wires and copper wires.<br />
• The main unit is the Power Section of the soft starter.<br />
Note that this Power Section is actually composed of three identical modules, one per phase.<br />
The input bus bars to the Power Section are on top of it marked L1,L2, L3.<br />
The output bus bars from the Power Section are on its bottom and are marked U, V, W.<br />
• Bypass Contactor is mounted on the right medium voltage compartment.<br />
• Verify on cabinet label that both, medium voltage and control voltage, are according to the supplied<br />
mains voltage and control voltage.<br />
• Input bus bars and output bus bars are located at the bottom of the cabinet.<br />
The input bus bars are at the input cabinet.<br />
The output bus bars are at the output cabinet.<br />
10.2.3 Low Voltage Compartment<br />
Figure 34 - <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Low Voltage Compartment<br />
• The Control Module is the heart of the soft starter which controls the firing angle of the thyristors<br />
(located in the Power Section).<br />
Warning: The six fiber optic wires on top of the control unit are sensitive to bending and heat.<br />
• The EPT-Rx (Electronic Potential Transformer Receiver) is located behind the Control Module.<br />
Note the two fiber optic wires connecting the EPT-Rx to the EPT-Tx (Electronic Potential Transformer<br />
Transmitter) (located in the Power Section). The EPT-Rx is equipped with a fused supply voltage<br />
connector.<br />
The EPT-Rx provides three phase replica of the mains voltages in level of 120VAC (line to line).<br />
These voltages are connected to the Control Module, and also (optional) to the motor protection relay<br />
(MPR) located on the door of the low voltage compartment.<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
89 • Commissioning and Operation Manual<br />
• Interposing relays connect the commands and indications to/from the Control Module.<br />
• The selector switches (DOL/Soft start and Local/remote/Comm./Off) are mounted inside the low<br />
voltage compartment to prevent accidental change in their position while the Line Contactor is closed.<br />
Note: it is forbidden to change the position of these selector switches while Line Contactor is closed.<br />
• The Firing Transformer located on the right side of the low voltage section.<br />
• The control terminals in the low voltage compartment are NOT for customer use.<br />
10.2.4 Fuses<br />
The soft starter includes four fuses:<br />
• Three fuses are located in the medium voltage Power Section, one per phase. They are located at the<br />
smaller PCBs PC2075 (for 110VAC, 230VAC, 220VDC control voltage) or PC2076 (for 110VDC,<br />
125VDC control voltage). These fuses are connected at the input side of the firing switched mode<br />
power supplies and rated 10A.<br />
To check these fuses:<br />
o In <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN rated up to 6.6kV it is required to disassemble the phases cover (open the plastic<br />
o<br />
screws as shown on Figure 35).<br />
In <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN rated from 10kV and up the power supplies are located at the top compartment in<br />
the medium voltage compartment as shown on Figure 36).<br />
Note:<br />
For 110VAC, 230VAC, 220VDC control voltage a blown fuse will prevent firing supply for Its own<br />
phase only.<br />
For 110VDC, 125VDC control voltage, any blown fuse will prevent firing supply of all three phases.<br />
Front View of the Power Section<br />
Power Supply to Firing PCB<br />
Figure 35 – Power Supply to Firing PCB (<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Models up to 6600V).<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
90 • Commissioning and Operation Manual<br />
Front View of the Power Section<br />
Power Supply to Firing PCB<br />
Figure 36 – Power Supply to Firing PCB (<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Models From 10000V and up)<br />
• One fuse is located in the Low voltage compartment, inside the input connector of the Electronic<br />
Potential Transformer Receiver (EPT-Rx). The EPT-Rx is located behind the Control Module.<br />
Bottom view of the EPT-Rx Use 5mm screw driver to remove<br />
the fuse holder from the socket<br />
Fuse holder with fuse in use<br />
and a spare fuse<br />
Figure 37 – EPT-Rx Fuse Replacement Procedure<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
91 • Commissioning and Operation Manual<br />
10.3 Standard Control Diagram<br />
Note!! • The following diagram shows a standard wiring for a 115VAC and 230V control voltage.<br />
• This drawing is given for demonstrating purposes only.<br />
• Note that the cabinet you have might be wired differently!!<br />
Figure 38 - <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN - Typical Control Wiring of Standard Cabinet<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
92 • Commissioning and Operation Manual<br />
• Control voltage is supplied via customer terminals number 1 & 2.<br />
• L.S. 1 is a limit switch that control the internal lighting fixture and signal to external control system (via<br />
terminal 42 & 44) that medium voltage door is opened. Customer can trip the incoming circuit breaker<br />
to disconnect medium voltage from the input bus bars of the cabinet for safety.<br />
• H is a heater to avoid humidity in the cabinet.<br />
• ES1 is a N.C. emergency stop push button mounted on the front of the low voltage compartment door.<br />
• Terminals 5 & 6 are for remote emergency stop N.C. push button. Customer can connect several N.C.<br />
push buttons located in several locations in the plant. For example: near the motor and at the control<br />
room.<br />
• L1-Line Contactor off (Red) – indicates that Line Contactor is open. Mounted on the front of the low<br />
voltage compartment door.<br />
• L2-Line Contactor on (Green) – indicates that Line Contactor is closed. Mounted on the front of the<br />
low voltage compartment door.<br />
• L3-Bypass Contactor on (Green) – indicates that Bypass Contactor is closed. Mounted on the front<br />
of the low voltage compartment door.<br />
• L4-Fault (Red) – indicates that the soft starter tripped either because of a fault indicated by the Control<br />
Module or from an internal motor protection or an external motor protection indication via customer<br />
terminals 17 & 18. Mounted on the front of the low voltage compartment door.<br />
• C1 is the Line Contactor. Mounted in the medium voltage compartment.<br />
• RC1 is an interposing relay to enable more contacts representing the position of the Line Contactor.<br />
• FT & FT/1 are the fault relays. The relays are energized in normal operation and de-energized upon<br />
fault indicated by the Control Module or from an external motor protection indication via customer<br />
terminals 17 & 18.<br />
• C2 is the Bypass Contactor. Mounted in the medium voltage compartment.<br />
• S1 is a selector switch for DOL/Soft Start by the user.<br />
When set to DOL:<br />
o<br />
o<br />
Energizes the Bypass Contactor C2<br />
Disconnects control voltage from the Control Module thus avoiding soft start and avoiding the<br />
Control Module to trip the motor in case of a fault.<br />
Note that external motor protection relays (if exist) will stay in operation and protect the motor.<br />
When set to Soft Start:<br />
o Bypass Contactor C2 is energized via the control circuitry.<br />
o The Control Module is powered from the Control voltage and the Control module is controlling<br />
the starting process and protecting the motor.<br />
• FR – is the firing relay controlled by the Control Module to energize the firing transformer (TR1 in the<br />
diagram).<br />
The firing transformer energizes the power supply PCBs which feed the firing PCBs in the Power<br />
Section. This is required only during soft start and soft stop periods<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
The firing transformer applicable in 115VAC, 230VAC control voltage. See different wiring of<br />
TR1 transformer for 115VAC and 230VAC<br />
In 220VDC control voltage a power supply (not shown in the diagram) is controlled by the FR<br />
relay<br />
In 110VDC and 125VDC the FR relay energize a power contactor that feeds the power supply<br />
PCBs (not shown in the diagram)<br />
• Soft Starter – is the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Control Module.<br />
• K1 – Is an interposing relay controlled by the internal IMMEDIATE relay of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN.<br />
Controlled by terminal 10 of the Control Module. The relay Energized when starter is in any condition<br />
except for stop and de-energized at stop. Its Normally Open contact is used in series with RC1 contact<br />
to hold the Line Contactor C1 energized at the soft stop process.<br />
• K3 – Is an interposing relay controlled by the internal FAULT relay of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN.<br />
Controlled by terminal 13 of the Control Module. Energized only when starter trips for fault. The<br />
normally closed contact is connected in series with the N.C. trip contact of the optional motor<br />
protection relay (MPR).<br />
• K2 – Is an interposing relay controlled by the internal END OF ACCELERATION relay of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-<br />
DN. Controlled by terminal 16 of the Control Module. K2 is energized after the end of the starting<br />
process to close the Bypass Contactor C2. K2 is de-energized upon Stop or Soft Stop commands or<br />
upon Fault.<br />
• EPT-Rx – Is the Electronic Potential Transformer – Receiver.<br />
• S2 - is a selector switch for Local/Remote/Comm./Off controlled by the user.<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
93 • Commissioning and Operation Manual<br />
o When set to Off disconnects control voltage to RS thus avoids the possibility to start the motor<br />
either locally or from remote<br />
o When set to Local enables control from ST & SP (start & stop) push buttons mounted on the<br />
front of the low voltage compartment door<br />
o When set to Remote enables control via terminals 15 & 16 by a maintained contact controlled<br />
by the customer<br />
o When set to Communication enables control via terminals 31 & 32 of the Control Module.<br />
These terminals are of the optional Relay PCB. The contacts are controlled by the<br />
communication link (either Modbus or Profibus).<br />
• L5-Remote control (White) – indicates that the cabinet is controlled remotely. Mounted on the front of<br />
the low voltage compartment door.<br />
• ST – N.O. contact of a push button controls the Start command locally. Mounted on the front of the low<br />
voltage compartment door.<br />
• SP – N.C. contact of a push button controls the Stop command locally. Mounted on the front of the low<br />
voltage compartment door.<br />
• RS – start relay controlled locally or remotely and if no fault is indicated will start the motor via the soft<br />
starter or DOL (depends on the position of selector switch S1).<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
94 • Commissioning and Operation Manual<br />
10.3.1 How Does it Operate?<br />
Selector switches position: Local/Remote/Comm./Off selector is in the Local position and DOL/Soft<br />
Start selector switch is in Soft Start position.<br />
Soft start process is initiated when the Start pushbutton (ST terminals 4 & 3) is pressed.<br />
RS relay is energized (RS terminals 2 & 10). RS N.O. contact (RS terminals 9 & 11), connected in parallel with<br />
the start pushbutton (ST terminals 4 & 3) and holds the relay energized.<br />
Line Contactor C1 and interposing relay RC1 are now energized via another N.O. contact of RS (RS terminals<br />
1 & 3).<br />
Start command to the soft starter is initiated after the Line Contactor is closed (C1 terminals 13 & 14) and via<br />
another N.O. contact of RS (RS terminals 6 & 7) to the soft starter by connecting control voltage to terminals 5<br />
& 6 of the Control Module.<br />
FR relay is energized and energizes the firing transformer via its N.O. contact. (FR terminals 1 & 3)<br />
Relay K1 (IMMEDIATE) is energized immediately after start command is initiated to the soft starter.<br />
The starter ramps up the mains voltage to the motor until it reaches full voltage.<br />
Relay K2 (END OF ACCELERATION) is energized after programmable time delay (default of 5 seconds). The<br />
Bypass Contactor C2 is energized through the N.O. contact of K2 (K2 terminals 6 & 7).<br />
FR relay de-energizes after 2 more seconds and disconnects the firing transformer from the control voltage.<br />
Motor is now running with the Bypass Contactor (C2) closed and the soft starter Power Section is idle.<br />
Soft stop process is initiated when the Stop pushbutton (SP terminals 1 & 2) is pressed.<br />
RS relay is de-energized.<br />
Soft Starter terminals 4 & 5 are disconnected (RS terminals 6 & 7) from the control voltage and cause the soft<br />
starter to enter into soft stop process.<br />
FR relay is energized and energizes the firing transformer via its N.O. contact. (FR terminals 1 & 3)<br />
K2 relay is de-energized.<br />
Bypass Contactor C2 de-energizes via the N.O. contacts of K2 (K2 terminals 6 & 7).<br />
The soft starter ramps down the voltage to the motor.<br />
At the end of the soft stop process the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN de-energizes K1 relay. N.O. contact of K1 (k1 terminals 6 &<br />
7) relay in series with N.O. contact of RC1 (RC1 terminals 1 & 3) act as a holding system to the Line<br />
Contactor C1. This enables the Line Contactor to be energized until the soft stop process is concluded.<br />
FR relay is de-energized and de-energizes the firing transformer via its N.O. contact. (FR terminals 1 & 3)<br />
Upon Fault condition:<br />
If trip condition, is detected by the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN, K3 is energized. FT and FT/1 are de-energized via N.C. contact<br />
of K3 (K3 terminals 5 & 6) causing RS to trip, C1 to trip and L4 (Fault indication lamp) to turn on.<br />
If trip condition is detected by the external motor protection relay, customer terminals 17 & 18 are opened,<br />
causing FT and FT/1 to be de-energized.<br />
Selector switches position: Local/Remote/Comm./Off selector is in the Remote position and DOL/Soft<br />
Start selector switch is in Soft Start position.<br />
The process is exactly the same as above but RS relay is directly controlled by the remote Start/Stop contacts<br />
(Customer terminals 15 & 16).<br />
WARNING!<br />
When operating the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN cabinet from Remote or via the communication<br />
links it is extremely important, because of safety reasons, to monitor the Trip<br />
relay (FT/1 terminals 39-40-41)) indication (See Figure 38 page 91).<br />
When the trip relay signals for trip remove the start command!<br />
Selector switches position: Local/Remote/Comm./Off selector is in the Comm. position and DOL/Soft<br />
Start selector switch is in Soft Start position.<br />
When it is required to control the cabinet via communication (not only to monitor and/or change the<br />
parameters) it is required to install, in additional to the communication PCB (either Modbus or Profibus), an<br />
optional Relay PCB.<br />
When the selector is set to communication control, the RS relay is controlled by a relay located in the optional<br />
Relay PCB mounted in the Control Module.<br />
Output terminals from the optional Relay PCB are 31, 32. Refer also to Figure 13 page 29.<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
95 • Commissioning and Operation Manual<br />
Selector switches position: Local/Remote/Comm./Off selector is in the Local or Remote position and<br />
DOL/Soft Start selector switch is in DOL position.<br />
Switch the selector Switch S1 to Bypass position only for testing the cabinet or in rare cases when the <strong>HRVS</strong>-<br />
DN does not function properly.<br />
When Selector switch S1 is in DOL position, control voltage from terminal 1 of the soft starter is removed thus<br />
the soft starter is not in active. Bypass Contactor C2 is energized.<br />
Start/Stop commands are initiated in the same way as if selector switch S1 is in Soft start.<br />
Notes:<br />
• When selector switch Local/Remote/Comm./Off is in Comm. position and DOL/Soft Start selector switch is in<br />
DOL position it is not possible to control the cabinet.<br />
• When DOL/Soft Start selector switch is in DOL position motor is not protected unless external or internal<br />
protections are installed.<br />
WARNING!<br />
When operating the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN cabinet from Remote or via the communication<br />
links it is extremely important, because of safety reasons, to monitor the Trip<br />
relay (FT/1 terminals 39-40-41)) indication (See Figure 38 page 91).<br />
When the trip relay signals for trip remove the start command!<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
96 • High-Pot Test of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Cabinet<br />
11. HIGH-POT TEST OF THE <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN CABINET<br />
Note: The high-pot test is performed in the factory as part of the cabinet FAT. (Factory Acceptance<br />
Test). Thus it is not recommended to do the high-pot test at customer site.<br />
High-pot test levels and duration are as follows:<br />
• Up to 3.6kV: 10kVAC for 60 seconds<br />
• Up to 7.2kV: 20kVAC for 60 seconds<br />
• Up to 12kV: 28kVAC for 60 seconds<br />
• Up to 15kV: 38kVAC for 60 seconds<br />
Two options for high-pot test available:<br />
• With the EPT-Tx connected. In this case only one test can be performed when the soft starter is<br />
short connected as one unit (L1 to U, L2 to V, L3 to W and L1 to L2 to L3)<br />
• With EPT-Tx disconnected. In this case it is possible to perform the high-pot test between each<br />
of the phases while the other two phases are grounded.<br />
11.1 High-Pot Test in <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV, EPT-Tx Connected<br />
Preparations (refer to Figure 39):<br />
Short circuit the L1B and U busbars of phase L1.<br />
Short circuit the L2B and V busbars of phase L2.<br />
Short circuit the L3B and W busbars of phase L3.<br />
Short circuit input-output phases of the Line Contactor.<br />
Short circuit U, V, W bus bars at the output of the soft starter.<br />
High-pot test procedure:<br />
Connect the ground cable of the High-pot tester to cabinet ground (earth).<br />
Connect the live cable of the High-pot tester to the soft starter basbars.<br />
Set the tester for the correct testing voltage, as specified above.<br />
Perform the test for 1 minute.<br />
Figure 39 – <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV – Preparations for High-pot Test<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
97 • High-Pot Test of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Cabinet<br />
Megger test:<br />
You can perform a Megger test (5kVDC) between the three phases connected together as one group<br />
and ground. This Megger test should give a very high resistance result.<br />
You can also perform a Megger test between the three phases. To do this you must connect L1B-U,<br />
L2B-V, L3B-W.<br />
Since the EPT-Tx is connected between the phases, the following resistances are be expected (all<br />
values are ±5%):<br />
<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Rated<br />
L1 – L2 L2 – L3 L1 – L3<br />
Voltage<br />
2.3kV 670KΩ 4MΩ 4.67MΩ<br />
3.3kV 1MΩ 6MΩ 7MΩ<br />
4.16kV 1.33MΩ 8MΩ 9.13MΩ<br />
6.6kV 2MΩ 12MΩ 14MΩ<br />
11.2 High-Pot Test in <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV, EPT-Tx Not Connected<br />
High-pot test procedure for L1 (refer to Figure 40):<br />
Dismantle the EPT-Tx<br />
Short circuit the L1B and U busbars of phase L1.<br />
Short circuit the L2B and V busbars of phase L2.<br />
Short circuit the L3B and W busbars of phase L3.<br />
Short circuit input-output phases of the Line Contactor.<br />
Connect to ground L2 and L3<br />
Connect the ground cable of the High-pot tester to cabinet ground (earth).<br />
Connect the live cable of the High-Pot tester to the soft starter busbars of L1.<br />
Set the tester to the correct testing voltage, as specified above. Perform the test for 1 minute.<br />
Figure 40 – <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV – EPT-Tx not Connected Preparations for High-pot Test, Testing L1<br />
High-pot test procedure for L2 (refer to Figure 41):<br />
Dismantle the EPT-Tx<br />
Short circuit the L1B and U busbars of phase L1.<br />
Short circuit the L2B and V busbars of phase L2.<br />
Short circuit the L3B and W busbars of phase L3.<br />
Short circuit input-output phases of the Line Contactor.<br />
Connect to ground L1 and L3<br />
Connect the ground cable of the High-pot tester to cabinet ground (earth).<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
98 • High-Pot Test of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Cabinet<br />
Connect the live cable of the High-Pot tester to the soft starter busbars of L2.<br />
Set the tester to the correct test voltage, as specified above. Perform the test for 1 minute.<br />
Figure 41 – <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV – EPT-Tx not Connected Preparations for High-pot Test, Testing L2<br />
High-pot test procedure for L3 (refer to Figure 42):<br />
Dismantle the EPT-Tx<br />
Short circuit the L1B and U busbars of phase L1.<br />
Short circuit the L2B and V busbars of phase L2.<br />
Short circuit the L3B and W busbars of phase L3.<br />
Short circuit input-output phases of the Line Contactor.<br />
Connect to ground L1 and L2<br />
Connect the ground cable of the High-pot tester to cabinet ground (earth).<br />
Connect the live cable of the High-Pot tester to the soft starter busbars of L3.<br />
Set the tester to the correct test voltage, as specified above. Perform the test for 1 minute.<br />
Figure 42 – <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV – EPT-Tx not Connected Preparations for High-pot Test, Testing L3<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Megger test:<br />
You can perform a Megger test (5kVDC) between each phase to ground.<br />
11.3 High-Pot Test in <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN from 10kV and Up, EPT-Tx Connected<br />
Preparations (refer to Figure 43):<br />
Short circuit the L1 and U busbars of phase L1.<br />
Short circuit the L2 and V busbars of phase L2.<br />
Short circuit the L3 and W busbars of phase L3.<br />
Short circuit input-output phases of the Line Contactor.<br />
Short circuit input-output phases of the Bypass Contactor.<br />
Short circuit U, V W bus bars at the output of the soft starter.<br />
High-pot test procedure:<br />
Connect the ground cable of the High-pot tester to cabinet ground (earth).<br />
Connect the live cable of the High-pot tester to the soft starter basbars.<br />
Set the tester to the correct test voltage, as specified above.<br />
Perform the test for 1 minute.<br />
99 • High-Pot Test of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Cabinet<br />
Figure 43 – <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN from 10kV and Up – Preparations for High-pot Test<br />
Note: You are allowed to perform a Megger test (5kVDC) between the three phases connected<br />
together as one group and ground. This Megger test should give a very high resistance result.<br />
You can also perform a Megger test between the three phases. To do so, make sure that the L1-U,<br />
L2-V, L3-W connections are performed.<br />
Since the EPT-Tx is connected between the phases, the following resistances are expected (all<br />
values are ±5%):<br />
<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Rated<br />
L1 – L2 L2 – L3 L1 – L3<br />
Voltage<br />
10kV 18MΩ 3MΩ 21MΩ<br />
11kV 20MΩ 3.3MΩ 23.3MΩ<br />
13.2kV 24MΩ 4MΩ 28MΩ<br />
13.8kV 24MΩ 4MΩ 28MΩ<br />
15kV 26MΩ 4.3MΩ 30.3MΩ<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
100 • High-Pot Test of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Cabinet<br />
11.4 High-Pot Test in <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN from 10kV and Up, EPT-Tx Not Connected<br />
High-pot test procedure for L1 (refer to Figure 44):<br />
Dismantle the EPT-Tx<br />
Short circuit the L1 and U busbars of phase L1.<br />
Short circuit the L2 and V busbars of phase L2.<br />
Short circuit the L3 and W busbars of phase L3.<br />
Short circuit input-output phases of the Line Contactor.<br />
Short circuit input-output phases of the Bypass Contactor.<br />
Connect to ground L2 and L3.<br />
Connect the ground cable of the High-pot tester to cabinet ground (earth).<br />
Connect the live cable of the High-Pot tester to the soft starter busbars of L1.<br />
Set the tester to the correct test voltage, as specified above. Perform the test for 1 minute.<br />
Figure 44 – <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN from 10kV and up, EPT-Tx not Connected, Preparations for High-pot Test, Testing L1<br />
High-pot test procedure for L2 (refer to Figure 45):<br />
Dismantle the EPT-Tx<br />
Short circuit the L1 and U busbars of phase L1.<br />
Short circuit the L2 and V busbars of phase L2.<br />
Short circuit the L3 and W busbars of phase L3.<br />
Short circuit input-output phases of the Line Contactor.<br />
Short circuit input-output phases of the Bypass Contactor.<br />
Connect to ground L1 and L3.<br />
Connect the ground cable of the High-pot tester to cabinet ground (earth).<br />
Connect the live cable of the High-Pot tester to the soft starter busbars of L2.<br />
Set the tester to the correct test voltage, as specified above. Perform the test for 1 minute.<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
101 • High-Pot Test of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Cabinet<br />
Figure 45 – <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN from 10kV and up, EPT-Tx not Connected, Preparations for High-pot Test, Testing L2<br />
High-pot test procedure for L3 (refer to Figure 46):<br />
Dismantle the EPT-Tx<br />
Short circuit the L1 and U busbars of phase L1.<br />
Short circuit the L2 and V busbars of phase L2.<br />
Short circuit the L3 and W busbars of phase L3.<br />
Short circuit input-output phases of the Line Contactor.<br />
Short circuit input-output phases of the Bypass Contactor.<br />
Connect to ground L1 and L2<br />
Connect the ground cable of the High-pot tester to Cabinet ground (earth).<br />
Connect the live cable of the High-Pot tester to the soft starter busbars of L3.<br />
Set the tester to the correct test voltage, as specified above. Perform the test for 1 minute.<br />
Figure 46 – <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN from 10kV and up, EPT-Tx not Connected, Preparations for High-pot Test, Testing L3<br />
Megger Test:<br />
You can perform a Megger test (5kVDC) between each phase to ground.<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
102 • Test Procedure for Low Voltage Testing<br />
12. TEST PROCEDURE FOR LOW VOLTAGE TESTING<br />
12.1 Accessories Required for LOW VOLTAGE Testing of the Starter and Cabinet.<br />
Control cable – three wires (two wires+ground) and a switch, to connect the control voltage (110VAC,<br />
230VAC, 115VDC, 125VDC or 220VDC).<br />
Note: Rated power of the control power source should be 2.5kW minimum. This will ensure all inrush<br />
current to the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN will not cause voltage drop to the control circuitry.<br />
Power cable - four wires (3 phase + ground) cable + fused three phase switch, to connect the low voltage<br />
400VAC three phase mains voltage to the cabinet. Prepare one side of the cable with a connector to the<br />
mains voltage according to the type of connectors used in the field. The other side with cable lugs or, more<br />
conveniently, with adequate alligator clips suit the bus bar size.<br />
Note: If low voltage mains is generated by a step up or step down transformer, its kVA should be 10 times<br />
greater than the testing motor kVA. Otherwise, the mains (low) voltage may be heavily distorted and<br />
prevent proper operation of the soft starter.<br />
Start / Stop toggle switch with 2 wire cable, to simulate the remote Start / Stop contact.<br />
Three phase 400VAC induction motor 5 -10KW. The motor should be loaded by a fan or any other kind of<br />
inertia (fly wheel).<br />
Digital multimeter.<br />
Test Harness with three colored wires (supplied with the cabinet, located in a small plastic bag in the<br />
drawings pocket).<br />
Note: Test harnesses for other than 400VAC (in the range of 440VAC to 690VAC) can be ordered. The<br />
test voltage (if other than the standard 400V), is indicated on the tape of the test harness.<br />
12.2 Notes and Warnings<br />
Notes:<br />
• The starter and the cabinet are designed to ensure a complete, convenient and safe test procedure for the<br />
starter and for the cabinet, using only the above accessories.<br />
• The next procedure should be used for the following:<br />
o To ensure that the unit functions properly.<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
To learn the operational modes and options of the cabinet.<br />
To test the cabinet together with the external control system (Factory Scada system, external<br />
PLC, etc.) It is strongly recommended to perform as many tests as possible in the low voltage<br />
mode to debug the external control system hardware and software in this low voltage mode<br />
until the entire system operates satisfactorily.<br />
To debug the system in a rare event of a problem in the starter, cabinet or control system.<br />
WARNING!<br />
• Make sure that Medium voltage is disconnected and secured.<br />
• Check that the test control voltage is equal to the rated control voltage.<br />
• Immediate damage can be expected if the control voltage level is incorrect.<br />
• Check that the three phase mains testing voltage is equal to 400VAC, which is<br />
the standard testing voltage. An immediate damage can be expected if the<br />
mains voltage is not 400VAC±10%.<br />
• Read the soft starter instruction <strong>manual</strong> carefully as well as the optional Motor<br />
Protection Relay (MPR) instruction <strong>manual</strong>, If installed.<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
103 • Test Procedure for Low Voltage Testing<br />
12.3 Low Voltage Test Procedure<br />
1. Disconnect mains voltage from the soft <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN cabinet.<br />
2. Ground the medium voltage lines.<br />
3. Put warning signs that will prevent anyone from connecting the medium voltage lines to<br />
the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN cabinet.<br />
4. The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN cabinet inputs bus bars (marked L1, L2, L3).should be free from any<br />
connection.<br />
Do not ground them, since low testing voltage should be connected to these input lines.<br />
5. Disconnect the medium voltage Motor lines from the output bus bars of the cabinet<br />
(marked U, V, W).<br />
6. Visual test. Make sure that there is:<br />
6.1. No mechanical damage<br />
6.2. No loose screws<br />
6.3. No excessive dust<br />
6.4. No loose parts.<br />
6.5. No cut wires<br />
6.6. No open fiber optic wires<br />
6.7. No broken insulators<br />
7. Connect the safety ground to the cabinet.<br />
8. Double check that the cabinet is free from any voltage connection and is disconnected<br />
also from the medium voltage motor.<br />
9. Disassemble the clear plastic cover in the front of the starter Power Section.<br />
10. Connect the low voltage test harness:<br />
10.1. <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV:<br />
Refer to section 12.3.2.1 page 106.<br />
10.2. <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN 10kV and up:<br />
Refer to section 12.3.2.2 page 107.<br />
11. Connect the motor cable to the output bus bars U, V, W.<br />
12. Connect the control voltage cable (equipped with switch) to customer terminals 1 & 2<br />
located in customer terminal compartment.<br />
13. Connect three phase cable (equipped with switch) to the input bus bars (L1, L2, L3),<br />
upstream the Line Contactor (so that voltage is disconnected from starter, when the<br />
contactor is open).<br />
14. Connect the remote control switch wires to customer terminals 15 & 16 located in<br />
customer terminal compartment.<br />
15. Turn on the two MCBs located in the top-left side of the low voltage section (marked e1<br />
and e2).<br />
16. Verify that the Emergency push button is in the normal operating position.<br />
17. Set DOL/Soft Start selector switch (S1) to Soft Starter position.<br />
18. Set the Local/Remote/Comm./Off selector switch (S2) to Local.<br />
19. Turn on the control voltage switch.<br />
20. The Control Module should be powered now.<br />
21. Verify that the remote control indication light (L5) on the external door is turned off.<br />
22. Get familiar with the soft starter settings, using its instruction <strong>manual</strong>.<br />
23. Press the Reset buttons on the soft starter Control Module panel and on the optional<br />
MPR panel.<br />
24. Enter MAIN & PROTECT. parameters. set:<br />
RATED LINE VOLT. – As indicated on the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN label<br />
STARTER FLC – As indicated on the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN label<br />
MOTOR FLA – As indicated on the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN label<br />
Browse all the way down until you see the message: STORE ENABLE MAIN &<br />
PROTECT.<br />
Press the Store button and wait for the message: DATA SAVED OK.<br />
25. Enter START parameters, set:<br />
SOFT START CURVE – set to 1 (standard)<br />
INITIAL VOLTGE – set to 10%<br />
NUMBER OF STARTS – set to OFF (to enable unlimited number of starts with the low<br />
voltage motor)<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
104 • Test Procedure for Low Voltage Testing<br />
Browse all the way down until you see the message: STORE ENABLE START<br />
PARAMETERS.<br />
Press the Store button and wait for the message: DATA SAVED OK.<br />
26. Enter STOP parameters, set:<br />
SOFT STOP CURVE – set to 1 (standard)<br />
DEC. TIME – set to 10SEC.<br />
Browse all the way down until you see the message: STORE ENABLE STOP<br />
PARAMETERS.<br />
Press the Store button and wait for the message: DATA SAVED OK.<br />
27. Turn off the control voltage.<br />
28. Release the four screws at the corners of the front panel of the soft starter control unit.<br />
Remove the front panel. Refer to Figure 15 page 40. Identify Main PCB - PC2050 and<br />
Fiberoptic PCB – PC2055.<br />
29. On the Main PCB – PC2050 set the required interface language on the display, you<br />
need to change the position of dip switches 5 & 6. Refer to section 6.4.3 page 41.<br />
30. On the Fiberoptic PCB – PC2055 set the Current gain dip switches for low voltage<br />
motor testing. Refer to section 12.3.1 page 106:<br />
Dip Switch #1 Dip Switch #2 Gain<br />
ON ON 1<br />
ON OFF 5<br />
OFF ON 13.4<br />
OFF OFF 67<br />
31. Re-check that the Gain dip switches of the three phases are set identically.<br />
32. Tilt back the display and re-install the front panel.<br />
33. While 400VAC mains voltage is still not connected to the cabinet, press the Start push<br />
button. The Line Contactor (C1) is energized for a short time and then trips. UNDER /<br />
NO VOLTAGE message is displayed on the screen of the soft starter’s control unit.<br />
Fault lamp lights on the external door.<br />
34. Press Reset on the Control Module. The fault indications are distinguished.<br />
35. Turn on the (three phase) mains low voltage.<br />
36. Verify that the Line Contactor is open and indication light on the external door is lit.<br />
37. Press the Start push button. The Line Contactor is energized and after a short time the<br />
soft start process begin. the LINE CONTACTOR ON indication light will indicate that<br />
the contactor is now closed. Since the motor is not heavily loaded, the starter enters<br />
RUN conditions in few seconds. After few more seconds(adjustable), the Bypass<br />
Contactor closes and the BYPASS CONTACTOR ON indication light is on.<br />
38. If the motor is not equipped with loading inertia and/or is not loaded, it may vibrate<br />
mechanically while reaching full speed. If this is the case, make sure that the motor is<br />
not too small, and that SOFT START CURVE 1!! is used. Also make sure that the Gain<br />
dip switches are in the correct position. If it does not help enough, try to replace motor<br />
with a loaded one (like a fan motor).<br />
39. Press the Stop pushbutton.<br />
The Bypass Contactor opens and the starter ramps down the voltage to the motor. At<br />
the end of the soft stop process, the Line Contactor opens and the motor slows down to<br />
a stop.<br />
Note: Since the motor is not loaded it may be seen, in the soft stop process that the motor<br />
runs normally and then stops just at the end of the soft stop process. Using a low current<br />
clamp ammeter it can be seen that during the soft stop process, motor current is reduced to<br />
approximately one half of its value while running before the soft stop process.<br />
40. Enter START parameters, set:<br />
ACC. TIME – set to 20sec.<br />
CURRENT LIMIT – set to 300%<br />
Browse all the way down until you see the message: STORE ENABLE START<br />
PARAMETERS.<br />
Press the Store button and wait for the message: DATA SAVED OK.<br />
Start the motor again and note that motor accelerates slower.<br />
41. When the motor is stopped, change the Local/Remote/Comm./Off selector switch (S2)<br />
to Remote. Now, the external Start / Stop pushbuttons have no effect. Verify that<br />
REMOTE indication light on the external door is lit on.<br />
42. Repeat the start / stop process using the external remote control switch.<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
105 • Test Procedure for Low Voltage Testing<br />
43. When the motor is stopped, change the Local/Remote/Comm./Off selector switch (S2)<br />
to Comm. Now, the external Start / Stop pushbuttons have no effect. Verify that<br />
REMOTE indication light on the external door is off.<br />
44. Repeat the start / stop process using the communication link.<br />
45. While the motor is stopped, change the DOL/Soft Start selector switch (S1) to DOL.<br />
Bypass Contactor C2 closes immediately. The Control Module is not powered now.<br />
Start the motor and notice that motor speed rise to maximum “at once” since it gets full<br />
voltage immediately when mains contactor C1 is closed.<br />
46. When the motor is stopped, set DOL/Soft Start selector switch (S1) to Soft Starter<br />
position and set the Local/Remote/Off selector switch (S2) to Local.<br />
47. Set the optional Motor Protection Relay (MPR) according to customer’s preferences.<br />
Note that the MPR cannot sense the start and run process, since the testing low voltage<br />
motor current is very low if compared to the rated current of the medium voltage motor.<br />
48. Clearing out of the low voltage test:<br />
48.1. Verify that both mains and control voltages are turned off and their plugs are pulled<br />
out.<br />
48.2. Disconnect the Test Harness from the EPT transmitter. Put it back in the small<br />
plastic bag and return to the drawing pocket.<br />
48.3. Disconnect mains, motor and control external cables.<br />
48.4. Reconnect power cables to the mains.<br />
48.5. Connect motor cables to the output bus bars.<br />
48.6. Re-assemble the clear plastic cover on top of the starter Power Section.<br />
48.7. Close the medium voltage compartment doors and secure the screws.<br />
48.8. Open the front panel of the Control Module of the soft starter. Loosen the 4 screws<br />
that hold the display in place then tilt it forward. this will give you access to the dip<br />
switches on the PC2055. Set the dip switches to ON. Tilt back the display and<br />
fasten its four screws. Reinstall the front panel of the Control Module.<br />
48.9. Connect control voltage to the cabinet.<br />
48.10. Enter TEST/MAINTENANCE OPTIONS (press Mode+) press Select 3 times until<br />
STORE NOW? DEFAULT SETTINGS shows. Press Mode+Store. Verify that DATA<br />
SAVED OK message appears.<br />
48.11. Enter TEST/MAINTENANCE OPTIONS (press Mode+) press Select 4 times until<br />
CLEAR NOW? STATISTICAL DATA shows. Press Reset+Store. Verify that DATA<br />
SAVED OK message appears.<br />
48.12. Enter TEST/MAINTENANCE OPTIONS (press Mode+) press Select 5 times until<br />
the clock adjustment display is shown. Set the time and date correctly.<br />
48.13. Enter MAIN & PROTECT. parameters. set:<br />
RATED LINE VOLT. – As indicated on the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN label<br />
STARTER FLC – As indicated on the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN label<br />
MOTOR FLA – As indicated on the medium voltage motor label.<br />
RATED MOTOR PWR – As indicated on the medium voltage motor label.<br />
SERVICE FACTOR – As indicated on the medium voltage motor label.<br />
Browse all the way down until you see the message: STORE ENABLE MAIN &<br />
PROTECT.<br />
Press the Store button and wait for the message: DATA SAVED OK.<br />
48.14. Enter START parameters, set the parameters as required for the medium voltage<br />
motor.<br />
If no other data is available, leave all parameters in their default values.<br />
48.15. Enter STOP parameters, set the parameters as required for the medium voltage<br />
motor. If Soft Stop process is used it is recommended to use same curve as for Soft<br />
Start.<br />
48.16. To ensure that there were no mistakes in storing the parameters, it is advised to turn<br />
off the control voltage and then turn it on, after 10 seconds.<br />
Verify that all above parameters are properly stored.<br />
Verify that statistical data is erased. (NO DATA message is displayed when<br />
browsing the STATISTICAL DATA)<br />
48.17. Turn off Control voltage.<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
106 • Test Procedure for Low Voltage Testing<br />
12.3.1 Current Gain Dip Switches Setting<br />
The unit is factory calibrated to the rated current of the starter. For example, if the rated current is 320A then<br />
the rated current of the low voltage motor used for testing would be 6A. The ratio between these current<br />
values is 53. In order to enable testing with that low level of current, additional gain should be added to the<br />
current path. To do so, loosen the four screws holding the display case that covers the upper Printed Circuit<br />
Board (PCB). Slide out the top while the two bottom screws are used as a shaft. On the right side of the<br />
PCB, there are three couples of Gain dip switches. Each pair is for a single phase. Note that all Gain dip<br />
switches are set to ON. Gain dip switch # 1 when set to off (for testing) adds gain of 5. Gain dip switch # 2<br />
when set to off, adds gain of 13.4. By setting both to OFF, a gain of 5x13.4=67 is added. Set the Gain dip<br />
switches according to the ratio between rated starting current and the motor rated current. In the above<br />
example of 320A versus 6A, set both Gain dip switches on each phase to OFF. Refer to Figure 47 below.<br />
12.3.2 Test Harness Installation<br />
Figure 47 – Current Gain Dip Switches Location<br />
Warning: The Standard test harness is designed for testing with low voltage mains, rated 400V.<br />
When the test harness is ordered for higher than 400V, internal resistors are normally connected<br />
in the middle of the wires. Never use the standard 400V Test Harness to perform low voltage tests<br />
with test voltages that exceed 400V . Higher than the specified voltage may cause damage to the<br />
EPT transmitter.<br />
12.3.2.1 Test Harness Installation in <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV<br />
The Test Harness includes three colored wires: blue, red and green wires.<br />
These wires are used to change the resistors voltage dividing ratio in the EPT-Tx (Electronic Potential<br />
Transformer Transmitter).<br />
At one end of each colored wire there is banana plug with the same color as of the wire.<br />
At the second end of the blue wire there is an alligator clip.<br />
The second end of the red and green wires are clamped together and connected to a second alligator clip.<br />
On the front side of the EPT-Tx you will see three colored round stickers: blue, red and green stickers.<br />
On the rear side of the EPT-Tx, exactly at same location as the stickers, there are three small holes. These<br />
holes have an internal banana jacks for the banana plugs.<br />
Connect the three banana plugs the banana jacks at the rear side of the EPT-Tx. Ensure that the wire colors<br />
match the round sticker colors at the front of the EPT-Tx.<br />
Connect the alligator clip marked “1”, with red and green wires to phase L1.<br />
Connect the alligator clip marked “3”, with blue wire to phase L3.<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
107 • Test Procedure for Low Voltage Testing<br />
The Test Harness is equipped with a long warning tape, intended to prevent forgetting it connected.<br />
Never cut this warning tape. Leave the warning tape open for its full length and laid in such a way<br />
that the harness will not be connected accidentally after the low voltage test.<br />
As a rule, always disconnect the harness immediately after ending the low voltage test. It should be<br />
mounted inside a small plastic bag in the drawing pocket mounted on the front door.<br />
Refer to Figure 48 below.<br />
EPT-Tx – bus bars in front of the EPT-Tx<br />
Test harness<br />
Figure 48 – <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV – EPT-Tx and Test Harness<br />
12.3.2.2 Test Harness Installation in <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN from 10kV and up<br />
The Test Harness includes three colored wires: blue, red and green.<br />
These wires are used to change the resistor voltages dividing ratio in the EPT-Tx (Electronic Potential<br />
Transformer Transmitter).<br />
At one end of each colored wire there is banana plug with the same color as the wire.<br />
At the other end of the blue wire there is an alligator clip.<br />
The other end of the red and green wires are clamped together and connected to a second alligator clip.<br />
On the front side of the EPT-Tx you will see three colored round stickers: blue, red and green.<br />
These stickers are located near three small holes. These holes have internal banana jacks for the banana<br />
plugs.<br />
Connect the three banana plugs to the banana jacks near the colored stickers at the front side of the EPT-Tx.<br />
Ensure that the wire and banana plugs colors match the round sticker near the hole.<br />
Connect the alligator clip marked “1”, with blue wire to phase L1.<br />
Connect the alligator clip marked “3”, with red and green wires to phase L3.<br />
The Test Harness is equipped with a long warning tape, intended to prevent forgetting it connected. Never cut<br />
this warning tape. Leave the warning tape open for its full length and laid in such a way that the harness will<br />
not be connected accidentally after the low voltage test.<br />
As a rule, always disconnect the harness immediately after ending the low voltage test. It should be mounted<br />
inside a small plastic bag in the drawing pocket mounted on the front door.<br />
Refer to Error! Reference source not found.below.<br />
EPT-Tx – EPT-Tx in front of the busbars<br />
Test harness<br />
Figure 49 – <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN From 10kV and up – EPT-Tx and Test Harness<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
108 • Start Procedure for Medium voltage Motor<br />
13. START PROCEDURE FOR MEDIUM VOLTAGE MOTOR<br />
13.1 Special Attention Notes<br />
Special<br />
Attention!<br />
• Make sure that you know where the Emergency stop button is located, so you<br />
can stop immediately if needed.<br />
• Verify that the Emergency stop button is operative and pushing the Emergency<br />
stop button disconnecting the motor from the mains.<br />
• During the entire starting time you should continuously read the three currents<br />
as shown on the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN LCD display. They should show, more or less same<br />
values.<br />
• If the currents are significantly different - STOP IMMEDIATELY. Do not wait the<br />
total start time until a trip occurs.<br />
• Verify that NUMBER OF STARTS parameter is set to 1 and STARTS PERIOD<br />
is set to 20.<br />
Remember ! Do not start too often, especially if the starting time is long.<br />
Prevent damage to both motor and starter !<br />
• Carefully read the Soft Starter <strong>Instruction</strong> Manual as well as the optional Motor<br />
Protection Relay (MPR) <strong>Instruction</strong> Manual if installed.<br />
• When mains voltage is connected to the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN, even if control voltage is<br />
disconnected, full voltage appear on the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN load terminals. Therefore,<br />
for isolation purposes, it is necessary to connect an isolating device upstream to<br />
the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN.<br />
• Power factor correction capacitors must not be installed on the load side of the<br />
<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN. When required, install capacitors on the line side of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN.<br />
• Do not interchange line and load connections. Verify correct connections to the<br />
<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN terminals: L1, L2, L3, L1b, L2b, L3b, U, V, W.<br />
• Before starting the motor verify its rotation direction. If needed, disconnect the<br />
rotor from the mechanical load and verify the correct direction of rotation.<br />
• Prior to start up procedure, make sure that line voltage and control voltage<br />
match the ones shown on the label of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN.<br />
• When the Start signal is initiated and a motor is not connected to load terminals,<br />
the S. SCR OR WR. CON protection will be activated. Other loads such as<br />
incandescent light bulbs, resistors, etc. may also cause a S. SCR OR WR. CON<br />
fault.<br />
13.2 Prior to Commissioning in Medium Voltage<br />
Verify that the Full Load Ampere (FLA) of the motor is lower than or equal to the Full Load Current (FLC) of<br />
the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN, and that the mains and control voltages are as indicated on the side and/or front label of the<br />
<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN.<br />
Verify that <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN FLC ≥ motor FLA!<br />
Verify that mains voltage is correct!<br />
Verify that control voltage is correct!<br />
<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN label - example<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
109 • Start Procedure for Medium voltage Motor<br />
13.3 Medium Voltage Test Procedure<br />
1. Verify that a Megger test was performed to the motor and its cables. This test should be carried<br />
when the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN is not connected to the motor.<br />
2. Verify that low voltage Test Harness and cables are disconnected and removed.<br />
3. Verify that all 6 Gain dip switches on the fiberoptic PCB (PC2055) are set to ON.<br />
4. Enter MAIN & PROTECT. parameters. set:<br />
RATED LINE VOLT. – As indicated on the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN label<br />
STARTER FLC – As indicated on the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN label<br />
MOTOR FLA – As indicated on the medium voltage motor label.<br />
RATED MOTOR PWR – As indicated on the medium voltage motor label.<br />
SERVICE FACTOR – As indicated on the medium voltage motor label.<br />
Browse all the way down until you see the message: STORE ENABLE MAIN & PROTECT.<br />
Press the Store button and wait for the message: DATA SAVED OK.<br />
5. Enter START parameters, set the parameters as required for the medium voltage motor.<br />
If no other data is available, leave all parameters in their default values.<br />
Verify that NUMBER OF STARTS parameter is set to 1.<br />
Remember ! Do not start too often, especially if starting time is long. Prevent damage to both<br />
motor and starter !<br />
Browse all the way down until you see the message: STORE ENABLE START PARAMETERS.<br />
Press the Store button and wait for the message: DATA SAVED OK.<br />
6. Enter STOP parameters.<br />
If Soft Stop process is required it is recommended to use same SOFT STOP CURVE as SOFT<br />
START CURVE.<br />
Set DEC. TIME<br />
If soft stop is not required, set Deceleration time (DEC. TIME) to minimum value (0 seconds).<br />
Browse all the way down until you see the message: STORE ENABLE STOP PARAMETERS.<br />
Press the Store button and wait for the message: DATA SAVED OK.<br />
7. Verify that all other parameters are setting properly for the application.<br />
8. Return the screen to the current display (first currents reading screen is in % OF MOTOR FLA).<br />
9. Be sure to know where an Emergency stop button is located, so you can stop immediately if<br />
needed.<br />
10. It is strongly recommended that another person stand near the motor and have cellular (or other)<br />
contact with you. He should be authorized to stop immediately (if a remote stop button is<br />
available) or to ask you to immediately stop in any case where an unusual mechanical noise is<br />
heard.<br />
11. During the entire starting time you should continuously read the three currents as shown on the<br />
starter’s display. They should show, more or less same values.<br />
12. If the currents are significantly different - STOP IMMEDIATELY. Do not wait the total start time<br />
until a trip occurs.<br />
13. In any problem occurs, look at the following troubleshooting instructions.<br />
14. It is strongly recommended to go back to the low voltage test if in doubt.<br />
15. After successful starting, with real load, set MAX START TIME (in START PARAMETERS<br />
page) to few seconds above the actual time seen in the STATISTICAL DATA page, to prevent<br />
starter and motor overheating if load is increased and motor cannot start.<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
110 • Start Procedure for Medium voltage Motor<br />
13.4 Standard Starting Process<br />
Apply START command<br />
Motor starts to turn<br />
shortly after START<br />
No<br />
Increase INITIAL VOLTAGE and start again<br />
Yes<br />
Initial inrush current or<br />
mechanical shock is<br />
too high?<br />
Yes<br />
Decrease INITIAL VOLTAGE and start again<br />
No<br />
Speed accelerates<br />
smoothly to nominal?<br />
No<br />
Current during<br />
acceleration is too<br />
high?<br />
No<br />
Motor speed does not<br />
accelerate to nominal?<br />
Yes<br />
Yes<br />
Yes<br />
No<br />
Decrease CURRENT LIMIT<br />
Increase CURRENT LIMIT<br />
Apply the STOP command and wait until the motor stops.<br />
Slightly increase INITIAL VOLTAGE<br />
A<br />
See next page<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
111 • Start Procedure for Medium voltage Motor<br />
A<br />
Apply the START command<br />
Motor acceleration time<br />
to full speed is as<br />
required?<br />
No<br />
If acceleration time is too short, increase<br />
ACCELARATION TIME setting and/or decrease<br />
CURRENT LIMIT setting (when decreasing CURRENT<br />
LIMIT, make sure that the motor increases speed<br />
gradually and does not stall).<br />
Yes<br />
• Check LAST START PERIOD and set MAX. START TIME to approximately 5 seconds<br />
longer than the LAST START PERIOD.<br />
• For future reference it is advised to keep records of the following parameters in the<br />
STATISTICAL DATA:<br />
LAST START PERIOD<br />
LAST START MAX I<br />
13.5 Examples of Starting Curves<br />
13.5.1 Light Loads - Pumps, Etc.<br />
(In these cases the actual current is always lower than the CURRENT LIMIT setting)<br />
INITIAL VOLTAGE- set to 30%<br />
CURRENT LIMIT - set to 300-350%<br />
ACCELERATION TIME- set to 10 sec.<br />
Upon start, the voltage quickly increases to the INITIAL VOLTAGE value (30% of Un) and then gradually<br />
ramps-up to nominal.<br />
The current will simultaneously increase to peak current value (lower than the CURRENT LIMIT setting),<br />
before smoothly decreasing to the operating current.<br />
13.5.2 High Inertia Loads: Crushers, Centrifuges, Mixers, Etc.<br />
(In these cases the actual current is at the CURRENT LIMIT setting during part of the starting time)<br />
INITIAL VOLTAGE– set 40%<br />
CURRENT LIMIT– set 400%<br />
ACCELERATION TIME– set 3 sec<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
112 • Start Procedure for Medium voltage Motor<br />
Upon START the voltage and current increase until the current reaches the CURRENT LIMIT value. The<br />
voltage remains at this value until the motor reaches close to nominal speed, where current starts to decrease<br />
and voltage continues to ramp-up to nominal.<br />
13.5.3 Special Starting Using DUAL ADJUSTMENT<br />
Using two starting characteristics, the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN will accelerate using standard characteristics (INITIAL<br />
VOLTAGE, ACCELERATION TIME and CURRENT LIMIT). After transition (tx) (IMMEDIATE relay delay),<br />
voltage to input terminal 8 is switched on using the DUAL ADJUSTMENT characteristic to complete<br />
acceleration.<br />
Perform the following steps:<br />
• To use DUAL ADJUSTMENT automatically, connect IMMEDIATE in series to input terminal 8 as shown in<br />
section 13.5.3.1 below.<br />
• Program IMMEDIATE/SHEAR-PIN relay to IMMEDIATE (default setting) and program RELAY ON DELAY to<br />
tx.<br />
• Program PROG. INPUT #8 to DUAL ADJUSTMENT (default setting).<br />
• Program standard parameters and DUAL ADJUSTMENT parameters as shown in the table below.<br />
Using two starting characteristics, the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN will accelerate to reach the 200% current limit. After tx<br />
voltage to PROG. INPUT #8 is switched on, using the DUAL ADJUSTMENT characteristic to complete<br />
acceleration.<br />
Parameter Main Setting DUAL ADJUSTMENT Setting<br />
INITIAL VOLTAGE 10% 25%<br />
ACCELERATION TIME t1 = 2-30 sec t2 = 2-30 sec<br />
CURRENT LIMIT 200% 300-400%<br />
RELAY ON DELAY tx = 1-60 sec. -----<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
113 • Start Procedure for Medium voltage Motor<br />
13.5.3.1 Special Starting – Using DUAL ADJUSTMENT – Wiring Diagram<br />
13.5.4 Choosing a Suitable Pump Curve (Centrifugal Pumps)<br />
13.5.4.1 Starting Curve<br />
• Adjust MAIN PARAMETERS as necessary (FLA, FLC, etc.).<br />
• Set STARTING CURVE, ACCELERATION TIME, CURRENT LIMIT, and INITIAL VOLTAGE to their default<br />
values (curve 1, 10 sec., 400% and 30% respectively).<br />
• Start the pump while watching the pressure gauge as the pump starts and look for overshooting (“pressure<br />
surge”) of the gauge needle above the target pressure. In case of over pressure, choose a peak torque<br />
reduction curve (SOFT START CURVE 2!!).<br />
• Set SOFT START CURVE 2!!, increase ACCELERATION TIME to 15 seconds and reduce CURRENT LIMIT<br />
to 350%. Start the pump and watch the pressure gauge while the pump starts.<br />
• In most cases, overshooting is reduced. If the overshoot persists, increase ACCELERATION TIME to 25<br />
seconds (confirm with motor manufacturer) and try again.<br />
• If the overpressure persists, increase the SOFT START CURVE setting to 3!!, or 4!!, if necessary. Each<br />
increase in the SOFT START CURVE setting will reduce the peak torque, thus reducing the overpressure<br />
and preventing “pressure surge” during start.<br />
13.5.4.2 Stopping Curve<br />
• Adjust MAIN PARAMETERS as necessary (FLA, FLC, etc.)<br />
• Set SOFT STOP CURVE and DECELERATION TIME, to their default values (curve 1, 10 sec.,<br />
respectively).<br />
• Stop the pump, watching the pressure gauge and check valve as the pump stops. Look for overshooting<br />
(“water hammer”) of the gauge (abruptly stops the pump and the motor).<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
114 • Start Procedure for Medium voltage Motor<br />
• Select SOFT STOP CURVE 2!! and increase DECELERATION TIME to 15 seconds. Stop the pump and<br />
watch the pressure gauge and the rate of closing of the check valve as the pump stops. Abrupt stopping of<br />
the pump and motor will cause a loud audible noise emitted from the check valve.<br />
• In most cases, “water hammer” is reduced. If “water hammer” persists, increase the time to 25 seconds<br />
(confirm with motor manufacturer) and try again.<br />
• If “water hammer” persists, increase the SOFT STOP CURVE setting to 3!!, or 4!!. Each increase in the<br />
SOFT STOP CURVE will reduce the abrupt stop of the pump, thus preventing the “water hammer”<br />
phenomenon.<br />
13.5.4.3 FINAL TORQUE During Soft-Stopping a Pump Motor<br />
While decelerating, the check valve may close before DECELERATION TIME has elapsed, thus allowing<br />
current to flow through stator winding causing unnecessary heat. Select FINAL TORQUE sensitivity to 1 and<br />
stop the pump, then confirm that the current stopped flowing through the motor shortly after the check valve<br />
closed.<br />
If current still flows more than 3-5 seconds after check valve closure, increase FINAL TORQUE (up to a<br />
maximum value of 10) to stop current flow earlier.<br />
13.6 How to set MPS-3000 and DPM-10 when installed with <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN<br />
If MPS-3000 (Solcon motor protection) and/or DPM-10 (Solcon digital power meter) are integrated in the<br />
<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN cabinet in a way that voltage readings are from the EPT and current measurements are from the<br />
<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN internal CTs special attention must be given to the setting of these units.<br />
Before setting the MPS-3000, read the MPS-3000 instruction <strong>manual</strong>.<br />
Before setting the DPM-10, read the DPM-10 instruction <strong>manual</strong>.<br />
If the MPS and DPM-10 use separate (not the internal soft starter) CTs and PTs (current and voltage<br />
transformers), then set all MPS and DPM-10 parameters according to the instruction <strong>manual</strong>.<br />
If, however the MPS and DPM-10 use the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Internal CTs and Electronic Potential Transformer (EPT),<br />
a number of parameter settings must be performed as explained below.<br />
Inside the soft starter, there is an EPT. Its “primary” rated voltage is equal to the starter rated voltage. Its<br />
“secondary” rated voltage is 120VAC.<br />
Inside the soft starter, special CTs are used. Their primary rated current equals to the starter rated current.<br />
Their secondary rated current is 2A. The secondary current is connected to the MPS-3000 5A input and to the<br />
DPM-10 5A input.<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
In the MPS-3000 SYSTEM PARAMETER setting page, please set:<br />
115 • Start Procedure for Medium voltage Motor<br />
LINE VOLTS<br />
VT PRIMARY<br />
VT SECONDARY<br />
MOTOR FLC<br />
CT PRIMARY<br />
GND CT PRIMARY<br />
= Actual rated line voltage (should be equal or lower than starter rated voltage).<br />
= Starter rated voltage (the Electronic Potential Transformer is calibrated to<br />
the starter rated voltage).<br />
= 120 (the EPT “secondary” rated voltage).<br />
= Actual Motor Name Plate (Rated) current (should be equal or lower than<br />
starter rated current).<br />
= 2.5 x Starter Rated Current. (See note 1 below)<br />
= same as CT PRIMARY setting.<br />
In the DPM-10 PARAMETER setting page, please set:<br />
P+ (Potential Transformer ratio) = Ratio between Primary and secondary of the P/T. Set to: Vn/120.<br />
If, for example Vn=3300V then set to: 3300/120=27.5.<br />
C+ (C.Ts Primary) = 2.5 x Starter Rated Current.<br />
Explanation of CT PRIMARY: If The rated starter current is - for example - 1000A, its CTs (that are used<br />
also for the MPS and DPM-10) are 1000 / 2A.<br />
Please note that CTs secondary current is 2A, not 5A as of the DPM-10 and as of the MPS-3000 (See note 1<br />
below).<br />
When 1000A flows, the DPM-10 and MPS-3000 gets only 2A instead 5A and will calculate 2 / 5 x1000 = 400A.<br />
Therefore we have to set the CT Primary to 1000x(5/2)=2500, which with 2A will read exactly 1000A as<br />
required.<br />
Notes:<br />
1. In the MPS-3000 there is a second set of current transformers with a secondary of 1A. (Terminals 82,<br />
85, 88 and 91).<br />
In this case, when 1000A flows, the MPS-3000 gets 2A instead 1A and will calculate 2 / 1 x1000 = 2000A.<br />
Therefore we have to set the CT Primary to 1000x(1/2)= 500, which with 2A will read exactly 1000A as<br />
required.<br />
2. In the MPS-3000 and DPM-10, each parameter has to be stored separately (while in the soft starter<br />
you store all parameters of a page together).<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
116 • Trouble Shooting<br />
14. TROUBLE SHOOTING<br />
The following procedures should be done only upon fault and in case trouble shooting is required.<br />
14.1 In-Out Resistance and Cathode-Cathode Resistance<br />
Verify that the motor is disconnected.<br />
Disconnect the cabinet mains isolator switch or fuses, if installed.<br />
In-Out resistances should be the same for all three phases in each model. Cathode-Cathode<br />
resistances are indicated in the following table:<br />
<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Rated<br />
Voltage<br />
L1 – U<br />
L2 - V<br />
L3 - W<br />
Cathode-Cathode<br />
2.3kV 1.2MΩ ±10% 1/2 of In-Out resistance<br />
3.3kV 135kΩ ±10%<br />
1/3 of In-Out resistance<br />
4.16kV 135kΩ ±10%<br />
6.6kV 300kΩ ±10%<br />
10kV 420kΩ ±10%<br />
11kV 450kΩ ±10%<br />
13.2kV 500kΩ ±10%<br />
13.8kV 500kΩ ±10%<br />
15kV 550kΩ ±10%<br />
1/5 or 1/6 of In-Out<br />
resistance. (depends<br />
on number of thyristors<br />
in the soft starter)<br />
Refer to Figure 50 In order to identify the Cathode terminals of all 6 SCRs on the firing PCB.<br />
A number is written on the firing PCB to identify the SCRs.<br />
Measure Cathode-Cathode resistances as follows:<br />
Cathode SCR#1 to Cathode SCR#4<br />
Cathode SCR#2 to Cathode SCR#5<br />
Cathode SCR#3 to Cathode SCR#6<br />
Verify that values correspond to the above table.<br />
14.2 Rgk (thyristors Gate-Cathode) Resistances.<br />
Thyristors Gate-Cathode resistances can easily be measured from the firing PCBs.<br />
In order to access the testing points the front cover of the Power Section needs to be dismantled.<br />
Gate-Cathode connection points of SCR#1 are illustrated in Figure 50. Measure all SCRs’ Rgk<br />
resistances in each of the phases.<br />
Rgk values should be about the same for all thyristors in the phase, and in the range of 7-20 Ω.<br />
Figure 50 – Firing PCB – SCR#1 Gate-Cathode Testing<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
14.3 Firing Test<br />
The purpose of this test is to check that the firing system of all thyristors functions properly.<br />
This procedure requires control supply voltage only (No need for mains three phases).<br />
• Disconnect mains. Verify all safety issues are<br />
resolved.<br />
• Open 10 hexagon head white plastic screws<br />
holding the front cover of all 3 phases.<br />
• Dismantle front cover of all three phases<br />
117 • Trouble Shooting<br />
• Identify 6 green LEDs and 6 red LEDs as<br />
shown in the picture.<br />
Number of LEDs varies for different voltages<br />
models.<br />
• Program input #7 to TEST. (Remember to<br />
store the parameter!) Refer to section 7.8.7<br />
page 71.<br />
• Connect control input voltage to terminal #7.<br />
The Test LED on the control keypad will lit.<br />
Refer to section 5.12 page 37.<br />
• Press the Mode key until the following appears<br />
in the display :<br />
FIRING TEST<br />
DISCONNECT MAINS<br />
Green<br />
LEDs<br />
Red<br />
LEDs<br />
Press the Select button.<br />
The display will show:<br />
FIRING PWR SUPPLY<br />
CHECK GREEN LEDS<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
118 • Trouble Shooting<br />
Press the Select button a second time.<br />
The display will show:<br />
FIRING NOW CHECK<br />
GREEN & RED LEDS<br />
Press the Select button a third time.<br />
The display will show:<br />
FIRING NOW CHECK<br />
ALL LEDS OF R&S<br />
Press the Select button a fourth time.<br />
The display will show:<br />
FIRING NOW CHECK<br />
ALL LEDS OF S&T<br />
Press the Select button a fifth time.<br />
The display will show:<br />
FIRING NOW CHECK<br />
ALL LEDS OF R&T<br />
Note:<br />
• The firing test is limited to 30 seconds. If you did not manage to conclude the test you can repeat until all 5<br />
stages are done.<br />
If the firing test fails:<br />
• Check the fuses in the switch mode power supplies (PC2075 for AC control voltage, PC2076 for DC control<br />
voltage). Refer to section 10.2.4 page 89 for fuse locations.<br />
Note: DC control voltage uses all three fuses in a series, so if one fails to operate, all firing LEDs can’t light.<br />
• Check that fiber optic wires # 1, 3 and 5 (firing phases 1, 2 and 3) are properly connected according to the<br />
markings on the Control Module.<br />
• Check that they are inserted into their connectors to the full depth and not damaged .<br />
• Check that the fiber optic wires of the power modules that are connected between the individual power<br />
supplies (PC2075 or PC2076) and the firing PCBs are properly inserted.<br />
• When Control Voltage is turned ON, the green LEDs in the power modules may blink shortly. This is normal.<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
119 • Trouble Shooting<br />
14.4 Low Voltage Test Trouble Shooting<br />
Problem<br />
<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Control<br />
Module is not<br />
powered after external<br />
control voltage is<br />
connected.<br />
Upon control voltage<br />
connection the <strong>HRVS</strong>-<br />
DN Control Module<br />
trips immediately<br />
PWR ON & NO STRT<br />
Trip occurs before<br />
starting.<br />
Local start command<br />
does not cause any<br />
action.<br />
Remote start<br />
command does not<br />
cause any action.<br />
What To Do<br />
• Verify that cabinet MCBs are set to ON position.<br />
• Verify that the Emergency Stop push button is released.<br />
• Verify that customer terminals 5 & 6 are jumpered.<br />
• Verify that the DOL/Soft Start selector switch is set to Soft Start.<br />
• Verify that rated control voltage is connected to customer terminals 1 & 2.<br />
• Verify correct polarity for DC control voltage.<br />
• Disconnecting control voltage from the Control Module and reconnecting the<br />
control voltage does not reset the soft starter if tripped.<br />
• Reset the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN by pressing the Reset key.<br />
• It occurs, when mains voltage is connected to the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN more than 30<br />
sec. without a start signal.<br />
• It may occur if mains voltage is connected downstream (“below”) from the<br />
Line Contactor instead of upstream (“above”) the Line Contactor. The starter<br />
protects itself from overheating.<br />
• Can be disabled for special applications.<br />
• Verify that the Local/Remote/Off Selector switch is set to Local and remote<br />
light does not light.<br />
• Verify that the Fault light is not active on the front panel, or on the starter<br />
control panel or on the MPR panel.<br />
• If the Fault light is turned ON:<br />
o Verify that there are no fault messages on <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN & MPR displays.<br />
o Reset if necessary.<br />
o Check setting of the trip relay logic (FAULT/FAULT FAIL-SAFE) of the<br />
soft starter and MPR. Improper setting de-energizes fault relays FT &<br />
FT/1.<br />
• Verify that the Local/Remote/Off Selector switch is set to Remote and the<br />
Remote indication light is on.<br />
• Verify that the Fault indication light is not active on the door and starter &<br />
MPR panels.<br />
• If the trip indication light is turned ON:<br />
o Verify that there are no fault messages on the Starter & MPR displays.<br />
o Reset if necessary.<br />
o Check setting of the trip relay logic (FAULT/FAULT FAIL-SAFE) of the<br />
soft starter and MPR. Improper setting de-energizes fault relays FT &<br />
FT/1.<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
120 • Trouble Shooting<br />
Problem<br />
UNDER/NO<br />
VOLTAGE trip occurs<br />
immediately after<br />
starting.<br />
OVER VOLTAGE trip<br />
occurs immediately<br />
after starting.<br />
PHASE SEQUENCE<br />
trip occurs<br />
immediately after<br />
starting.<br />
TOO MANY STARTS<br />
trip occurs<br />
immediately after<br />
starting.<br />
S.SCR OR WR CON.<br />
Trip occurs after<br />
starting.<br />
What To Do<br />
• Verify that all three mains phases are connected.<br />
• At low voltage, testing a missing phase can cause UNDER/NO VOLTAGE<br />
trip.<br />
• Verify that the test harness is connected to the EPT-Tx while testing at low<br />
voltage.<br />
• Verify that the Line Contactor is closed, at least for a short time, at the<br />
beginning of the start process.<br />
• If external line (mains) contactor is used, ensure that its auxiliary contact is<br />
wired back to the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN cabinet and used (in series with RS relay<br />
contact) to initiate the start command (this contact should not be bridged in<br />
the customer terminals).<br />
• Check UNDERVOLT. TRIP setting level in MAIN & PROTECT page.<br />
• Verify that the Electronic Potential Transformer Receiver (EPT-Rx) fuse<br />
located in the Receiver auxiliary supply plug is OK.<br />
• Verify that the fiber optics wires connecting the EPT-Tx and EPT-Rx are<br />
properly connected.<br />
• Move the external mains connection from upstream of the Line Contactor to<br />
down stream the Line Contactor and turn on the mains voltage . Check<br />
120VAC line to line between EPT-Rx output terminals. Try to start now.<br />
• Take out fibers 11 and 13 from the EPT-Rx, they should emit red light with<br />
the same intensity.<br />
• Check that the 15 pin white connector is properly connected, at the back of<br />
the Control Module.<br />
• Make sure that the mains testing voltage is 400V or as written as on the test<br />
harness.<br />
• If it is higher, disconnect the mains voltage immediately.<br />
• Check OVERVOLT. TRIP setting level in MAIN & PROTECT page.<br />
• Phase sequence of the mains lines is wrong.<br />
• Two options are available:<br />
o Swap two input lines.<br />
o Set PHASE SEQUENCE setting in FAULT PARAMETERS as<br />
required.<br />
• The default setting allows for one start per 20 minutes.<br />
• To reset the fault find the NUMBER OF STARTS setting at the end of the<br />
START PARAMETERS page, increase setting to OFF, then reset. Store at<br />
the end of the page.<br />
• Be sure to set for medium voltage operation after end of testing.<br />
• Verify that the motor’s rated current multiplied by the Gain (as set by the dip<br />
switches) is greater than or equal to 30% of FLC.<br />
• It may occur when the load is not a motor.<br />
• Verify that fiber optic wires 1,3 & 5 are properly connected.<br />
• Verify that Current Gain dip switches are set equally for the three phases and<br />
according to the ratio between starter rated current and testing motor rated<br />
current.<br />
• Try to start using SOFT START CURVE 0, the basic curve. If the motor is not<br />
loaded and has no inertia, the motor may vibrate after reaching full speed.<br />
This is normal and will not occur with the MV motor.<br />
o If the test motor starts properly then the current transformers and their<br />
wiring should be checked.<br />
o If the test motor does not start properly the measured current may be<br />
too low.<br />
• Perform a firing test as described on section 14.3 page 117.<br />
• Check fuses and fuses holders in phases firing power supplies. Refer to<br />
section 10.2.4 page 89.<br />
• Sometimes SOFT START CURVE 0 enables the soft start process, even if a<br />
CT or its wiring is problematic, if mains conditions are not ideal or with nonstandard<br />
motor. Current in every phase must, however be above 5% of<br />
starter FLC, or the same trip might occur.<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
121 • Trouble Shooting<br />
Problem<br />
SET CURVE TO 0 trip<br />
occurs after starting.<br />
Motor makes irregular<br />
noise while starting.<br />
O/C-SHEAR PIN trip<br />
occurs immediately<br />
after starting.<br />
PHASE LOSS trip<br />
occurs after starting.<br />
UNBALANCE<br />
CURRENT trip occurs<br />
after starting.<br />
GROUND FAULT trip<br />
occurs after starting.<br />
What To Do<br />
• Check that pairs of Gain dip switches are set identically for the three phases.<br />
• Try SOFT START CURVE 0.<br />
• Verify that the motor is not too small. Try to use a larger motor, with inertia or<br />
loaded, if possible.<br />
• If vibration occurs at the beginning of start process with SOFT START<br />
CURVE 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 try SOFT START CURVE 0.<br />
• If vibrations occurs at the beginning of start process with SOFT START<br />
CURVE 0 check low voltage test harness installation, fiber optic 11 & 13 and<br />
EPT-Rx outputs.<br />
• Vibrations, when approaching full speed at the start of SOFT START CURVE<br />
0 with motors that have no load are normal and do not indicate a problem.<br />
With other SOFT START CURVE it can occur with small / unloaded motor<br />
which accelerates too fast. Try to reduce INITIAL VOLTAGE to a minimum.<br />
• Verify that current Gain dip switches are set according to the ratio between<br />
the rated current of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN and the testing motor rated current .<br />
• If the test motor is loaded or has some inertia, try to start with SOFT START<br />
CURVE 0, the basic curve. If the problem is solved, then test the current<br />
transformers and their wiring. Sometimes the SOFT START CURVE 0<br />
enables a loaded motor to start properly, even if a CT or its wiring are faulty<br />
or with a problematic mains (weak transformer for the low voltage test).<br />
• Check that all fibers are properly connected according to their numbers.<br />
• Verify that Current Gain dip switches are set according to the ratio between<br />
the rated current of the starter and the testing motor rated current.<br />
• The trip can occur if added (by setting of Gain dip switches) gain is too high.<br />
• Try to start with SOFT START CURVE 0 and stop with SOFT STOP CURVE<br />
0. If problem us solved the current transformers and their wiring should be<br />
checked.<br />
• Check that all fiber optic wires are properly connected.<br />
• Verify that all three phases are within range.<br />
• Verify that EPT-Tx and EPT-Rx fiber optic wires are properly connected.<br />
• If low voltage mains is powered from a generator, check that frequency is<br />
within the range of 46Hz < f
122 • Trouble Shooting<br />
Problem<br />
Motor vibrates<br />
mechanically at the<br />
end of starting<br />
process or at the<br />
beginning of soft stop.<br />
current fluctuates.<br />
OPEN BYPASS trip<br />
occurs after end of<br />
start process.<br />
Current reading as<br />
displayed on starter’s<br />
panel is not correct.<br />
OVERLOAD trip<br />
occurs after Bypass is<br />
closed.<br />
UNDER CURRENT<br />
trip occurs after<br />
Bypass is closed.<br />
MPR does not<br />
respond to current<br />
during low voltage<br />
motor starting.<br />
Motor is started<br />
immediately after<br />
resetting a trip.<br />
What To Do<br />
• This phenomena may occur with unloaded or lightly loaded motor, if SOFT<br />
START CURVE 0 is used.<br />
• Use standard curve SOFT START CURVE 1 and SOFT STOP CURVE 1.<br />
• Verify that Current Gain dip switches are set according to the ratio between<br />
the rated current of the starter and the testing motor rated current.<br />
• Check Bypass Contactor wiring.<br />
• Verify that <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN FLC setting parameter is set according to the rated<br />
current of the starter.<br />
• Current Gain dip switches gain current reading as follows:<br />
o Both Gain dip switches of phases set to on -> gain = 1<br />
o Gain dip switches # 1 of phases set to off -> gain = 5<br />
o Gain dip switches # 2 of phases set to off -> gain = 13.4<br />
o Both Gain dip switches of phases set to off -> gain = 67<br />
• Use a Clamp-on the Ammeter to measure test the motor current.<br />
• Starter’s current reading should be approximately actual current multiplied by<br />
the gain ratio set by the Gain dip switches.<br />
• Set parameters to default parameters and re-program the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN.<br />
• Verify that current Gain dip switches are set according to the testing motor<br />
rated current versus rated current of the starter. Overload trip can occur if<br />
gain (set by Gain dip switches settings) is too high.<br />
• Verify that the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN FLC setting parameter is set according to the rated<br />
current of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN.<br />
• Set Motor FLA identically to <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN FLC.<br />
• Reset, start again and read currents on screen.<br />
• Check if current readings after start are is more than starter’s rated current.<br />
• Reduce setting of Undercurrent setting in the MAIN & PROTECT Parameters<br />
settings.<br />
• This is normal. The MPR (Motor Protection Relay) does not have extra gain<br />
for testing. Its current reading may be very low, below the minimum<br />
threshold.<br />
• Might occur when the Local / Remote switch is set to remote, and the remote<br />
contact is closed.<br />
Note: It is the responsibility of the remote controller to open the remote<br />
start/stop contact immediately upon trip.<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
123 • Trouble Shooting<br />
14.5 Medium Voltage Trouble shooting<br />
This troubleshooting table is intended for Medium voltage testing, while medium voltage and motor are<br />
connected to the cabinet .It is intended to be used only after low voltage tests are successfully performed.<br />
WARNING!<br />
It is absolutely forbidden to open one or more of the medium voltage doors, even if the<br />
motor is not running and Line Contactor is open.<br />
It is not advised to try troubleshooting the system while connected to the medium<br />
voltage mains. Should any other than operational or minor problem occur, it is<br />
recommended to go back to the low voltage test.<br />
Before starting, recheck rated mains voltage and current, and compare them to <strong>HRVS</strong>-<br />
DN rated values.<br />
Note: If the mains network is weak (long lines, small transformers, generator supply),<br />
it is recommended to set SOFT START CURVE 0 and SOFT STOP CURVE 0.<br />
Problem<br />
<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Control<br />
Module is not powered<br />
after external control<br />
voltage is connected.<br />
Upon control voltage<br />
connection the <strong>HRVS</strong>-<br />
DN Control Module<br />
trips immediately<br />
PWR ON & NO STRT<br />
Trip occurs before<br />
starting.<br />
Local start command<br />
does not cause any<br />
action.<br />
Remote start<br />
command does not<br />
cause any action.<br />
What To Do<br />
• Verify that the cabinet MCBs are set to the ON position.<br />
• Verify that the Emergency Stop push button is released.<br />
• Verify that customer terminals 5 & 6 are jumpered.<br />
• Verify that the DOL/Soft Start selector switch is set to Soft Start.<br />
• Verify that rated control voltage is connected to customer terminals 1 & 2.<br />
• Verify correct polarity for DC control voltage.<br />
• Disconnecting control voltage from the Control Module and reconnecting the<br />
control voltage do not reset the soft starter if tripped.<br />
• Reset the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN by pressing the Reset key.<br />
• It occurs, when mains voltage is connected to the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN more than 30<br />
sec. without a start signal.<br />
• Normal control logic is such that the start command first closes the Line<br />
Contactor and apply medium voltage to the L1, L2, L3 bus bars of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-<br />
DN IP00 unit.<br />
• When the Line Contactor is located outside the cabinet, make sure that its<br />
auxiliary contact is wired to apply control input voltage to terminals 5 & 6 of<br />
the Control Module via the customer terminals. The auxiliary contact of the<br />
Line Contactor must be connected in a series to a contact of the RS relay.<br />
• Verify that the Local/Remote/Off Selector switch is set to Local and remote<br />
light does not lit.<br />
• Verify that the Fault light is not active on the front panel, on the starter control<br />
panel or on the MPR panel.<br />
• If the Fault light is turned ON:<br />
o Verify that there are no fault messages on <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN & MPR displays.<br />
o Reset if necessary.<br />
o Check the settings of the trip relay logic (FAULT/FAULT FAIL-SAFE)<br />
of the soft starter and MPR. Improper settings de-energizes fault<br />
relays FT & FT/1.<br />
• Verify that the Local/Remote/Off Selector switch is set to Remote and the<br />
Remote indication light is on.<br />
• Verify that Fault indication light is not active on the door, starter and MPR<br />
panels.<br />
• If the trip indication light is turned ON:<br />
o Verify that there are no fault messages on Starter & MPR displays.<br />
o Reset if necessary.<br />
• Check setting of the trip relay logic (FAULT/FAULT FAIL-SAFE) of the soft<br />
starter and MPR. Improper setting de-energizes fault relays FT & FT/1.<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
124 • Trouble Shooting<br />
Problem<br />
UNDER/NO<br />
VOLTAGE trip occurs<br />
immediately after<br />
starting.<br />
OVER VOLTAGE trip<br />
occurs immediately<br />
after starting.<br />
PHASE SEQUENCE<br />
trip occurs<br />
immediately after<br />
starting.<br />
TOO MANY STARTS<br />
trip occurs<br />
immediately after<br />
starting.<br />
S.SCR OR WR CON.<br />
Trip occurs after<br />
starting.<br />
SET CURVE TO 0<br />
trip occurs after<br />
starting.<br />
Motor makes irregular<br />
noise while starting.<br />
O/C-SHEAR PIN trip<br />
occurs immediately<br />
after starting.<br />
What To Do<br />
• Verify that the Mains voltage is connected (no open Isolator, etc.).<br />
• Verify by listening, that the Line Contactor is closed at start, at least for a<br />
short period of time (until the Trip command opens it).<br />
• If an external Line Contactor is used, ensure that its auxiliary contact is wired<br />
back to the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN cabinet and used (in series with RS relay) to apply the<br />
start command in terminals 5 & 6 in the Control Module (this contact should<br />
not be bridged in the customer terminals.<br />
• Check UNDERVOLT TRIP setting level in the MAIN & PROTECT setting<br />
page.<br />
• Verify that the fuse located in the EPT-Rx connector did not melt. Refer to<br />
section 10.2.4 page 89.<br />
• Check that the 15 pin white connector is properly connected, at the back of<br />
the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Control Module<br />
• Disconnect and secure the mains source.<br />
• Check EPT-Tx to EPT-Rx fiber optic connections.<br />
• If required perform a second low voltage test .<br />
• Verify that <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN rated voltage is identical to mains voltage.<br />
• Check OVERVOLT TRIP setting level in MAIN & PROTECT page.<br />
• If the unit is powered from the generator, check its output voltage.<br />
• Phase sequence of the mains lines is wrong.<br />
• Two options are available:<br />
o Swap two input lines.<br />
o Set PHASE SEQUENCE setting in FAULT PARAMETERS as<br />
required.<br />
• Check and verify correct settings of the following parameters in the START<br />
PARAMETRS page: NUMBER OF STARTS, STARTS PERIOD and START<br />
INHIBIT. Refer to section 7.8.3 page 60.<br />
• Warning: Wait at least the required time between starts to prevent damage,<br />
both to the starter and motor !<br />
• Verify that the Current Gain dip switches are set to ON.<br />
• Disconnect medium voltage and verify that motor and mains input are<br />
properly connected.<br />
• Check that all fiber optic wires are properly connected.<br />
• Set SOFT START CURVE 0 and try to start.<br />
o If the problem is solved and the start process is OK, leave it on SOFT<br />
START CURVE 0. Set SOFT STOP CURVE 0 as well.<br />
o If the problem is not solved then the measured current in one or more<br />
phases may be too low.<br />
• Another reason can be nonstandard motor parameters.<br />
• SOFT STOP CURVE 0 may enable it to function properly, even if the mains<br />
conditions are not ideal or with non-standard motor. Current in every phase<br />
must however be above 10% of starter FLC, or the same trip may occur.<br />
• Mains and system conditions are not optimal for other than SOFT START 0<br />
and SOFT STOP CURVE 0. Set both parameters in START PARAMETERS<br />
page and in STOP PARAMETERS page.<br />
• Try to start the motor again.<br />
• Check that all fiber optic wires are properly connected.<br />
• Try to start with SOFT START CURVE 0.<br />
• If the problem is resolved, check the current transformers and their wiring.<br />
• SOFT START CURVE 0 may enable it to function properly even if a CT or its<br />
wiring are faulty.<br />
• Verify that current Gain dip switches are set to on and not left in the<br />
high gain off position, used for the low voltage test.<br />
• Try to start and stop with SOFT START 0 and SOFT STOP CURVE 0.<br />
• If the problem is solved, check the current transformers and their<br />
wiring.<br />
• Check that all fiber optic wires are properly connected.<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
125 • Trouble Shooting<br />
Problem<br />
PHASE LOSS trip<br />
occurs after starting.<br />
UNBALANCE<br />
CURRENT trip occurs<br />
after starting.<br />
GROUND FAULT trip<br />
occurs after starting.<br />
Motor vibrates<br />
mechanically at the<br />
end of starting<br />
process or at the<br />
beginning of soft stop.<br />
current fluctuates.<br />
OPEN BYPASS trip<br />
occurs after end of<br />
start process.<br />
Current reading as<br />
displayed on starter’s<br />
panel is not correct.<br />
OVERLOAD trip<br />
occurs after Bypass is<br />
closed.<br />
UNDER CURRENT<br />
trip occurs after<br />
Bypass is closed.<br />
Motor is started<br />
immediately after<br />
resetting a trip.<br />
What To Do<br />
• Verify that all three phases are within range.<br />
• Verify that EPT-Tx and EPT-Rx fiber optic wires are properly connected.<br />
• If low voltage mains is powered from a generator, check that the frequency is<br />
within the range of 46Hz < f
126 • Spare Parts<br />
15. SPARE PARTS<br />
When ordering spare parts for <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN specify the model and the serial number of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN as shown<br />
on its label and/or on its documentation.<br />
Recommended spare parts list for a soft starter:<br />
All spare parts are for:<br />
Model: <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN____ ______ _____ _____ ________<br />
Serial number:____________________<br />
Description<br />
Cat. Number<br />
(to be filled by the factory)<br />
Quantity in<br />
standard<br />
soft starter<br />
Recommended<br />
quantity as<br />
spare parts<br />
Complete stack (phase<br />
assembly)<br />
3 1<br />
Firing PCB 3 1<br />
Power supply for firing PCB 3 1<br />
EPT-Rx TRAF540964 (identical for all models) 1 1<br />
EPT-Tx 1 1<br />
Current transformer …/2 3 3<br />
Control module.<br />
Order with all options<br />
installed)<br />
Firing transformer<br />
Or<br />
DC power supply<br />
Fiber optic wires<br />
Set of support rods for<br />
disassembling phase module<br />
for <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV<br />
Low voltage components<br />
spare parts. (terminal blocks,<br />
indication lights, fuses, etc…)<br />
Line and Bypass<br />
Contactors/VCBs<br />
1 1<br />
1 1<br />
10m<br />
TOOL00002 - 1<br />
1<br />
2 1<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
127 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (ModBus Protocol)<br />
16. <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN COMMUNICATION (MODBUS PROTOCOL)<br />
16.1 Introduction<br />
This document summarizes the Modbus serial link protocol to / from the Digital Soft Starter (<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN). The<br />
<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN can be equipped with many other serial link protocols.<br />
Features:<br />
* RS485 Hardware.<br />
* Asynchronous serial link.<br />
* Half duplex.<br />
* Format: Modbus RTU Mode (Remote Terminal Unit Mode).<br />
- Binary,<br />
- Each character contains 11 bits:<br />
- 1 start bit<br />
- 8 data bits, least significant bit sent first.<br />
- 1 Parity bit. Even / Odd / No can be selected.<br />
- 1 Stop bit if Parity is used, 2 stop bits if Parity is not used.<br />
- Cyclical Redundancy Check (CRC), 16 bits.<br />
* Baud Rates: 1200 / 2400 / 4800 / 9600 bits per second.<br />
* Response time of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN:<br />
- Normally, 4ms
128 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (ModBus Protocol)<br />
16.2 Basic Structure of the Serial Link Frame<br />
The Modbus RTU frame has the same principal structure for both the "Query" transmission from the Master to<br />
the Slave (<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN) and the Response transmission from the Slave to the Master:<br />
"sync": Silent Interval for at least 3.5 character times 1<br />
byte 1: Serial Link No. (= Slave Address) (1..247)<br />
byte 2: Function (1,2,3,4,5,6,8,15 &16 are supported)<br />
byte 3: Data Bytes ($XX)<br />
. . ($XX)<br />
. . ($XX)<br />
byte n-1: CRC_Low<br />
($XX)<br />
byte n : CRC_High<br />
($XX)<br />
"sync": Silent Interval for at least 3.5 characters<br />
16.3 SYNC (Silent Interval)<br />
In RTU mode, messages use a "Silent Interval" more than 3.5 characters to "synchronize". This silent interval<br />
separates transmission frames.<br />
The entire frame must be transmitted as a continuous stream. A silent interval of more than 3.5 characters<br />
during frame transmission will cause the receiving device to ignore the incomplete frame. The next byte is<br />
assumed to be the Serial Link No. of the next frame.<br />
Ignoring the frame can also occur if a second message is transmitted less than 3.5 characters from the end of<br />
the previous frame. This causes the receiving device to consider that frame to be a continuation of the first<br />
frame, thus resulting in a CRC error.<br />
16.4 Serial Link No. (Slave Address)<br />
Contains <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Slave Number (1..247) on the serial link. The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN default value is 248, which is the<br />
communication OFF condition. Serial Link No. is used as the first byte in both the "Query" transmission from<br />
Master to Slave and in Response transmission from Slave to Master.<br />
Note: Address 0, which is normally used for broadcast transmissions is not supported by the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN.<br />
16.5 Function<br />
The Function code informs the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN what action is requested. In most cases, Function is used as the<br />
second byte in both the "Query" transmission from Master to Slave and in Response transmission from Slave<br />
to Master.<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
129 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (ModBus Protocol)<br />
16.6 List of Functions Supported By The <strong>HRVS</strong>DN<br />
Function Modbus Name<br />
Use in <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN<br />
01 Read Coil Status Read discrete commands status.<br />
02 Read Input Status Read discrete inputs status.<br />
03 Read Holding Registers. Read parameter settings.<br />
Read actual data (for Modbus Plus users).<br />
04 Read Input Registers. Read actual data.<br />
05 Force Single Coil. Force one discrete command.<br />
06 Preset Single Register. Write one parameter setting.<br />
08 Diagnostics. Loopback diagnostics.<br />
15 Force Multiple Coils. Force discrete commands.<br />
16 Force Multiple Registers Write parameter setting<br />
control commands<br />
DATA<br />
Data field includes information transferred to and from the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN. The specific data format is changed with<br />
Function. When Word data parameters are transmitted, High Byte is transmitted first, followed by the Low<br />
Byte.<br />
CRC<br />
The CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) two bytes (16 bit) are used to check the bytes of the entire frame.<br />
It is generated in the master device and transmitted as the last two bytes of the frame (Low byte is appended<br />
first, followed by the High byte). The slave device regenerates the CRC bytes and compares it to the CRC<br />
bytes received. If the CRC bytes are not identical, the frame is flushed and no response is transmitted to the<br />
master.<br />
<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN MEMORY ORGANIZATION<br />
The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN memory is organized according to the common Modbus addresses as follows:<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
130 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (ModBus Protocol)<br />
<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Use<br />
Memory Type Max Query/Response Parameters<br />
Actual Data 3X References Registers, # 1..150, addressed 0.. 149.<br />
4X References Registers, #257...384 addr. 256..283<br />
Parameter Settings 4X References Registers, # 1..110, addressed 0..109<br />
Hardwired Control Inputs 1X References Inputs, # 1..16, addressed 0..15.<br />
Discrete Serial Commands 0X References Coils, # 1..16, addressed 0..15.<br />
Control Commands 4X ReferencesRegister, # 753, addressed 752.<br />
Notes:<br />
1. Actual Data parameters can be read both at 3X references starting at parameter #1, or (same parameters)<br />
at 4X references starting at parameter #257 (100 hex higher). The additional mapping in 4X references is<br />
designed for the convenience of Modbus Plus users.<br />
2. <strong>HRVS</strong>_DN can be controlled using the standard discrete commands (Coils, 0x references) or by writing to<br />
parameter setting #753 with function 16. The additional control option using 4X references is designed for<br />
the convenience of Modbus Plus users. To control, write to register #753 (address 752) only! (one register<br />
write, with function 16).<br />
3. Function 3 should be used to read 4X references. Function 4, to read 3x references.<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
131 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (ModBus Protocol)<br />
16.7 Actual Data (3X References & 4X references)<br />
Actual data includes measured values such as voltage, current and insulation resistance. It includes both<br />
logic and statistical information. All parameters are word (two bytes) parameters. The protocol supports only<br />
reading of these parameters.<br />
Parameter # is "1 based". The actual parameter address is 1 lower than parameter #. For example the<br />
address of parameter #1 is 0 (30000).<br />
The parameters have double mapping, at the following 3x & 4x references:<br />
Note: Function 4 should be used to read 3x references and function 3 to read 4x references.<br />
Parameter # (3x) # (4x) Comment<br />
Logic Status 1 257 Logic status of <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN. 1 indicates:<br />
d15: <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Trip.<br />
d14: Motor Stopped.<br />
d13: Motor in Soft Stop Process.<br />
d12: Motor in Start Process.<br />
d11: Motor is Running.<br />
d10: Motor is running with Closed By_Pass.<br />
d9: Up_To_Speed. Like d10 and I reduced (once) below<br />
115% of FLA.<br />
d8: Reserved.<br />
d7: Dual_Adjust On.<br />
d6..d0: Reserved.<br />
Note: After bypass is closed, trip (d15) and running (d11),<br />
can be ON together. See Trip_after_By-Pass setting<br />
parameter at fault parameters page.<br />
Hardwired inputs 2 258 Discrete Hardwired control inputs:<br />
d15..d8: Reserved.<br />
d7: External fault 2, Terminal 20.<br />
d6: External Fault 1,Terminal 19.<br />
d5: Reserved.<br />
d4:Programmable Input , Terminal 8<br />
Programming options:<br />
0-D.Adj / 1- Slow.Speed / 2-Reset<br />
d3: Programmable Input, Terminal 7<br />
Programming options:<br />
0-Test1 / 1-Reverse / 2-Reset<br />
d2: Start Input. Terminal 6<br />
d1: Soft Stop Input. Terminal 5<br />
d0: Stop Input. Terminal 4<br />
Relays 3 259 d0 - Immediate,d1- End Of Acc, d2 - Fault relay<br />
Voltage 4 260 Line voltage, % of rated voltage.<br />
I1_amp 5 261 Current of phase 1, Ampere.<br />
I2_amp 6 262 Current of phase 2, Ampere.<br />
I3_amp 7 263 Current of phase 3, Ampere.<br />
Reserved 8 264<br />
Dip_Switch 9 265 d15..d8: Reserved.<br />
d7: Setting Lock - (right-most)<br />
d6: Enlarged Setting Ranges<br />
d5: Language Selection.<br />
d4: Language Selection.<br />
d3: Reserved - Must be set to Off.<br />
d2: Generator Starting - Set to Off.<br />
d1: Tacho feedback available (1).<br />
d0: Min (off) / Max display pages- (left most)<br />
Phase_Sequence 10 266 1: Correct Phase seq. 0 : Wrong Phase Seq.<br />
Motor Insulation R 11 267 Motor Insulation Resistance [KOhm]<br />
Reserved 12..14 268..270<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
132 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (ModBus Protocol)<br />
Power 15 Power consumption [KW]<br />
Parameter # (3x) # (4x) Comment<br />
Reactive Power 16 Reactive Power consumption [KVAR]<br />
Power Factor 17 Power Factor * 100<br />
Time Since Last Start 18 Elapsed minutes since last start<br />
Frequency 19 Frequency [tenth Hz]<br />
Reserved 20..24<br />
Logic_Status_at_Power_Fail 25 281 Logic Status at Control Pwr Supply turn off.<br />
(See parameter # 1 for detailed description)<br />
Total_Run_Time 26 282 Total Hours of Running Motor.<br />
Total_Starts 27 283 Total Number Of Starts<br />
Last_Start_Period 28 284 Duration of Last Start, Seconds.<br />
Last_Start_Peak_I 29 285 Peak Current During Last Starting process<br />
Time_To_Start 30 286 After Too Many Starts Trip, Seconds.<br />
Total_Trips 31 287 Total Number Of Trips<br />
Last_Trip_Number 32 288 Number of the fault that caused trip.<br />
No. Fault<br />
01 Over Temperature<br />
02 Overcurrent / Shear pin<br />
03 Overload<br />
04 Under Current<br />
05 Under / No Voltage<br />
06 Over Voltage<br />
07 Phase Loss<br />
08 Phase Sequence<br />
09 Wrong Connection or Shorted Scr<br />
10 Long Start Time<br />
11 Slow Speed Time (Future feature)<br />
12 External Fault 1 (Input # 3)<br />
13 External Fault 2 (Input # 4)<br />
14 Wrong Parameters<br />
15 Mains ON & No Start Signal<br />
16 Too Many Starts<br />
17 Currents Unbalance<br />
18 Thermistor (Future feature)<br />
19 Ground Fault<br />
20 Open By-Pass<br />
21 Frequency out of range<br />
Pre_Trip_I 33 289 Current at trip time, % of FLA.<br />
Reserved 34..38 290..294<br />
Thermal Capacity 39 295 Simulated winding temperature, %. 100% = trip<br />
Reserved 40 296<br />
Clk_Hour 41 297 Setting can be done at # 131<br />
Clk_Minute 42 298 Setting can be done at # 132<br />
Clk_Month 43 299 Setting can be done at # 133<br />
Clk_Date 44 300 Setting can be done at # 134<br />
Clk_Year 45 301 Setting can be done at # 135<br />
Reserved 46 302<br />
KWH 47,48 303,304 dword parameter (47=LSword,48=MSword)<br />
KVARH 49,50 305,306 dword parameter (49=LSword,50=MSword)<br />
Reserved 51..56 307..312<br />
Trip_Array(10) 57..66 313..322 List of last 10 Trip<br />
(See fault list starting at parameter # 24)<br />
Trip_Hour_Array(10) 67..76 323..332 List of time (Hour) of the last 10 trips<br />
Trip_Minute_Array(10) 77..86 333..342 List of time (Minute) of the last 10 trips<br />
Trip_Date_Array(10) 87..96 343..352 List of date (Date) of the last 10 trips<br />
Trip_Month_Array(10) 97..106 353..362 List of date (Month) of the last 10 trips<br />
Trip_Year_Array(10) 107..116 363..372 List of date (Year) of the last 10 trips<br />
Trip_Pointer 117 373 Pointer for the 10 cyclic above arrays<br />
Actual_Data_Group 151..170 407..426 Group of 20 actual parameters selected by<br />
setting parameters #90..109<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
133 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (ModBus Protocol)<br />
Example 1:<br />
To read actual parameters 5,6,7 (I1,I2,I3 Actual Parameters, Addressed as 4.5 and 6) of <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN # 18 (its<br />
Serial Link No. = 18) , the host computer should send following frame:<br />
Another Possibility<br />
(Modbus Plus users)<br />
byte 1: Serial Link No. ($12) ($12)<br />
byte 2: Function ($04) ($03)<br />
byte 3: Starting Address High ($00) ($01)<br />
byte 4: Starting Address Low ($04) ($04)<br />
byte 5: No. of Points High ($00) ($00)<br />
byte 6: No. of Points Low ($03) ($03)<br />
byte 7: CRC_Low ($XX) ($XX)<br />
byte 8: CRC_High ($XX) ($XX)<br />
The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN response, when Current = 400 % of FLA, and Voltage = 420V, is:<br />
byte 1: Serial Link No. ($12) ($12)<br />
byte 2: Function ($04) ($03)<br />
byte 3: Byte Count ($06) ($06)<br />
byte 4: Data High, parameter 5 ($01) (400) ($01)<br />
byte 5: Data Low, parameter 5 ($90) ($90)<br />
byte 6: Data High, parameter 6 ($01) (420) ($01)<br />
byte 7: Data Low, parameter 6 ($A4) ($A4)<br />
byte 8: Data High, parameter 7 ($01) (410) ($01)<br />
byte 9: Data Low, parameter 7 ($9A) ($9A)<br />
byte 10: CRC_Low ($XX) ($XX)<br />
byte 11: CRC_High ($XX) ($XX)<br />
Note: $XX indicates Hexadecimal byte.<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
134 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (ModBus Protocol)<br />
16.8 Parameter Settings (4X References)<br />
Parameter settings include all parameters that can be set <strong>manual</strong>ly. These parameters determine the modes<br />
of operation of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN. They also set protections level. All parameters are word (two bytes)<br />
parameters. The protocol supports both reading and modifying of (most of) these parameters.<br />
Note: Use function 3 to read the setting parameters.<br />
Any one of these parameters must be set with care. Inappropriate settings of some parameters can<br />
result in damage to both the motor and the <strong>HRVS</strong>DN.<br />
The parameters have the following 4x references:<br />
Parameter # Range Default<br />
Main & protect. parameters<br />
Rated Line Voltage 1 6600..15000 6600 (Volt.)<br />
Starter FLC 2 20..1800 150 (Amp.)<br />
Motor FLA 3 20..1800 150 (Amp.)<br />
Rated Motor Power 4 50..40000 1000 (KW)<br />
Service Factor 5 100..130% 100 (%)<br />
Undercurrent Trip 6 0..90 0 (% of FLA)<br />
Undercurrent Delay 7 1..40 10 (Seconds)<br />
Overcurrent Shear Pin 8 100..850 850 (% of FLA)<br />
Overcurrent Delay 9 0..50 5 (0.5 Sec.)<br />
Overload Class 10 IEC 5,10,15,20,25,30 IEC Class 10<br />
NEMA 5,10,15,20,25,30 FLA)<br />
Overload Protect 11 0=Disable 1=Enable While Run<br />
1=Enable While Run<br />
2=Enable<br />
Unbalance Trip 12 10..100, 101 = Off. 20 (%)<br />
Unbalance Delay 13 1..60 5 (Seconds)<br />
Ground Fault Trip 14 10..100, 101 = Off. 20 (% of FLA)<br />
Ground Fault Delay 15 1..60 5 (Seconds)<br />
Undervoltage Trip 16 50..90 70 (%)<br />
Undervoltage Delay 17 1..100 5 (Seconds)<br />
Overvoltage Trip 18 110..125, 126 (=off) 120 (%)<br />
Overvoltage Delay 19 1..10 2 (Seconds)<br />
Reserved 20..24<br />
Start Parameters<br />
Soft Start Curve 25 0..11 (6..11 are for Tacho only) 1 (Standard).<br />
Pulse Level 26 70 (%of FLA) – 700 (%of FLA) 70% of FLA<br />
Pulse Time 27 0..10 (Tenth Seconds) 0 (No Pulse)<br />
Initial Voltage 28 10..80 30 (% of full voltage)<br />
Initial Current 28 ! 100..400 % of FLA 100 % of FLA<br />
Current Limit 29 100..700 400 (% of FLA)<br />
Acceleration Time 30 1..90 10 (Seconds)<br />
Max. Start Time 31 1..250 30 (Seconds)<br />
Number Of Starts 32 1..10 & (11 = off) 1<br />
Starts Period 33 1..60 20 (Minutes)<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
135 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (ModBus Protocol)<br />
Parameter # Range Default<br />
Start Inhibit 34 1..60 minutes 15 (Minutes)<br />
Run Contact Delay 35 0..120 minutes 5 (Seconds)<br />
Turn Bypass On at 35 121..250 % of Motor FLA Only with relay PCB for<br />
optional sync motor start<br />
Min Time To Bypass 36 3..60 3sec.<br />
Only with relay PCB for<br />
optional sync motor start<br />
Reserved 37..40<br />
Stop Parameters<br />
Soft Stop Curve 41 0..11 (6..11 are for Tacho only) 1 (Standard)<br />
Deceleration Time 42 0..90 0 (Seconds)<br />
Final Torque 43 0..10 0 (Minimum)<br />
Reserved 44..48<br />
Dual Adjustment Parameters<br />
DA: Initial Voltage 49 10..80 % of full voltage 30<br />
DA: Initial Current 49 ! 100..400 % of FLA 100 % of FLA<br />
DA: Current Limit 50 100..700 400 % of FLA<br />
DA: Acceleration Time 51 1..90 10 (Seconds)<br />
DA: Deceleration Time 52 0..90 0 (Seconds)<br />
DA: Motor_FLA 53 20..1800 150 (Amp.)<br />
Reserved 54..56<br />
Fault Parameters<br />
UV & PL Auto Reset 57 0 / 1 (0 - No, 1 - Yes) 0 (No)<br />
Under Current Reset 58 10..120 (&121-off) 121 (Off)<br />
ByPass Open Trip 59 0 / 1 (0 – Disable,1 - Enable) 1 (Enable)<br />
Trip after Bypass 60 0 / 1 (0 – Disable,1 - Enable) 1 (Enable)<br />
By-Pass Auto Reset 61 0 – No, 1 – Yes 0 - No<br />
Set Curve 0 Flt 62 0 / 1 (0 – Disable,1 - Enable) 1 (Enable)<br />
Power On & No Start 63 0 / 1 (0 – Disable,1 - Enable) 1 (Enable)<br />
Insulation Alarm 64 1(Off) – 100 (10Mohm) 1 (Off)<br />
Insulation Trip 65 1(Off) – 100 (10Mohm) 1 (Off)<br />
Phase Sequence 66 0 – Pos., 1 – Neg., 2 – Ignore 0 (Positive)<br />
Reserved 67..72<br />
I/O Programming<br />
Prog. Input # 7 (terminal 7) 73 0 ..3 (0-Test,1-Resst) 1 (Reset)<br />
0 - Test<br />
1 - Reset<br />
2 - Multi Soft Stop– consult the factory.<br />
3 - Current Control– consult the factory.<br />
Prog. Input # 8 (terminal 8) 74 0 / 1 (0-D.Adj.,1-Rseet) 0 (Dual Adjust)<br />
Fault Relay Type 75 0..1 (0-Fault, 1-Fault Fail Safe) 0 (Fault)<br />
Immediate Relay Type 76 0..1 (0-Immediate, 1-shear pin) 0 (Immediate)<br />
Realy On Delay 77 0..3600 0 (Seconds)<br />
Realy Off Delay 78 0..3600 0 (Seconds)<br />
Analog output 79 0..1 (0 - Normal, 1 - Inverted) 0 (Normal)<br />
Reserved 80<br />
Communication Parameters<br />
Comm. Protocol 81 0 – Modbus, 1 – Profibus 0 – Modbus<br />
Modbus Baud Rate 82 12..192 (*100) 192 (19200 bps)<br />
Parity Check 83 0/1/2 (Even / Odd / No) 0 (Even)<br />
Serial Link Number 84 1..247 & (248= Off) 248 (Off)<br />
S. Link Parameters Save 85 0 – Disable, 1 – Enable 0 (Disable saving)<br />
Serial Link Control 86 0 – Disable, 1 – Enable 0 (Disable Control)<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
136 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (ModBus Protocol)<br />
Front Comm. Address 87 1..247 & (248= Off) 248 (Off)<br />
Parameter # Range Default<br />
Reserved 88,89<br />
Modbus_#_Array 90..109 1..60 (# of parameter) (default # are:<br />
1-Logic_Status, 5 - I1, 6-I2, 7 - I3, 4 - V, 2 - Ctrl-In, 3- Ctrl_Out<br />
(relays), 15-Power,17-Power Factor, 8 - frequency,<br />
10 - Phase Sequence, 26-Total Run Time,<br />
27 - Total Starts, 31 - Total Trips, 28 - Last Start Period,<br />
29 - Last Start Peak I, 32-Last Trip Number, 33-Pre Trip I,<br />
39-Thermal Capacity, 11 – Insulation Resistance<br />
Notes:<br />
1. Parameter # is "1 based". The address is 1 lower than parameter #. For example address of parameter #1<br />
is 0 (40000).<br />
2. When the Preset Single Register Function (06) is used to adjust one parameter setting, the<br />
communication program checks that the parameter value is within the allowed limits. If not, an Exception<br />
Response (Exception code 03) is returned instead of Normal response. See Exception Responses later in<br />
this document.<br />
3. If Preset Multiple Register Function (16) is used to adjust one or multiple parameter settings, then even if<br />
one or more parameter settings are out of range, Normal response will be returned.<br />
<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN program will check later the value of each parameter. If it is beyond the allowed limit, the limit<br />
value will be stored instead of the transmitted parameter value.<br />
4. It is strongly recommended to preset parameter settings only when the motor is stopped. The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN<br />
enables, however to preset one parameter (using function 06 only) when the motor is running with closed<br />
Bypass Contactor. When motor is Soft Started, Soft Stopped, runs with open bypass or at slow speed, the<br />
<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN ignores "Preset Single Register" or "Force Multiple Register" instructions. A "busy" Exception<br />
response is returned by the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN whenever its logic condition does not enable presetting.<br />
5. Always wait more than 0.5Sec after using Functions 06 or 16 to preset parameter(s) before transmitting<br />
again to the same <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN.<br />
6. Communication parameters 81, 82, 83 can only be read through the serial link. They can only be set<br />
(written) <strong>manual</strong>ly.<br />
7. It is the user’s responsibility to read and check all changed parameter settings after presetting.<br />
8. It is not possible to write data to the setting parameters when dip switch 8 (pc2000) is set.<br />
Example 2:<br />
To Read Stop Parameter settings 41-43 addressed as 40-42 (Soft Stop Curve, Deceleration Time and Final<br />
Torque) of <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN # 96. The host computer sends the following frame:<br />
byte 1: Serial Link No. ($60)<br />
byte 2: Function ($03)<br />
byte 3: Starting Address High ($00) (40)<br />
byte 4: Starting Address Low ($28)<br />
byte 5: No. of Registers High ($00)<br />
byte 6: No. of Registers Low ($03)<br />
byte 7: CRC_Low ($XX)<br />
byte 8: CRC_High ($XX)<br />
The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN normal response:<br />
byte 1: Serial Link No. ($60)<br />
byte 2: Function ($03)<br />
byte 3: Byte Count ($06)<br />
byte 4: Data High ($00) (Soft Stop Curve = 0)<br />
byte 5: Data Low ($00)<br />
byte 6: Data High ($00) (Deceleration Time = 10Sec)<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
yte 7: Data Low ($10)<br />
byte 8: Data High ($00) (Final Torque = 0)<br />
byte 9: Data Low ($00)<br />
byte 10: CRC_Low<br />
($XX)<br />
byte 11: CRC_High<br />
($XX)<br />
137 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (ModBus Protocol)<br />
Example 3 :<br />
To write one setting parameter (Under_Voltage_Trip = 300V) to Parameter Setting # 16 (Addressed as 15) of<br />
<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN # 5, the host computer should send following frame:<br />
byte 1: Serial Link No. ($05)<br />
byte 2: Function ($06)<br />
byte 3: Starting Address High ($00)<br />
byte 4: Starting Address Low ($0F) (15)<br />
byte 5: Preset Data High ($01) (300)<br />
byte 6: Preset Data Low ($2C)<br />
byte 7: CRC_Low ($XX)<br />
byte 8: CRC_High ($XX)<br />
The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN normal response, is an echo of the query (Identical frame).<br />
Example 4 :<br />
To write multiple parameter settings (Undervoltage__Trip = 300V, Under_Voltage_delay = 10Sec,<br />
Over_Voltage_Trip = 480V, Over_Voltage_delay = 2Sec) to Parameter settings # 16-19 (Addressed as 15-18)<br />
of <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN # 128, the host computer sends the following frame:<br />
byte 1: Serial Link No. ($80)<br />
byte 2: Function ($10)<br />
byte 3: Starting Address High ($00)<br />
byte 4: Starting Address Low ($0F)<br />
byte 5: No. of Registers High ($00)<br />
byte 6: No. of Registers Low ($04)<br />
byte 7: Byte Count ($08)<br />
byte 8: Data High ($01) (300)<br />
byte 9: Data Low ($2C)<br />
byte 10: Data High ($00) (10)<br />
byte 11: Data Low ($10)<br />
byte 12: Data High ($01) (480)<br />
byte 13: Data Low<br />
($E0)<br />
byte 14: Data High ($00) (2)<br />
byte 15: Data Low ($02)<br />
byte 16: CRC_Low<br />
($XX)<br />
byte 17: CRC_High<br />
($XX)<br />
The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN normal response:<br />
byte 1: Serial Link No. ($80)<br />
byte 2: Function ($10)<br />
byte 3: Starting Address High ($00)<br />
byte 4: Starting Address Low ($0F)<br />
byte 5: No. of Registers High ($00)<br />
byte 6: No. of Registers Low ($04)<br />
byte 7: CRC_Low ($XX)<br />
byte 8: CRC_High ($XX)<br />
Note:<br />
A Normal response will be returned even if the preset data value is beyond the allowed range for one or more<br />
parameter settings. Later the <strong>HRVS</strong>DN program will check the value of each parameter. If it exceeds the<br />
allowed limit, the limit value will be stored instead the transmitted parameter value. It is the user’s<br />
responsibility to read and check all parameter settings after presetting.<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
138 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (ModBus Protocol)<br />
16.9 Control Register Write (4X Reference)<br />
The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN incorporates one Control register intended for controlling the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN.<br />
Address: The Control register is register # 753 addressed as 752 (40752).<br />
In order to control the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN using the Control register:<br />
* Use Function 16 only.<br />
* Use Address_High (page) = 2<br />
* Use Address_Low = 240 (0F0H).<br />
* Write to one register only.<br />
* Use data_high (ms-byte of data) = 5AH.<br />
* Data_low Bits resolution of the control register (ls-byte of data):<br />
bit function Comment Note<br />
d0 Reserved.<br />
d1 Reserved.<br />
d2 Reserved.<br />
d3 Start/Stop Relay Write "1" (ON) to Start / Run. Operates relay (terminals 31-32)<br />
Write "0" (OFF) to Stop. Located in the Control Module<br />
optional Relay Card.<br />
d4 Dual Adjust Write "1" (ON) to turn On.<br />
Write "0" (OFF) to turn Off.<br />
d5 Reserved.<br />
d6 Reserved.<br />
d7 Reset Write "1" (ON) to Reset.<br />
Notes:<br />
1. Read function of the control register is not available. To read the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN status, read Logic<br />
Status (Actual parameter # 1).<br />
2. Bytes 2..8 of the control frame must be exactly as in the following example. Otherwise, an error<br />
message is returned.<br />
3. Hardwired Stop and Soft Stop inputs, overrides the communication. To enable motor starting<br />
through communication, terminal 4 (Stop) must be connected to the control voltage. Connect<br />
terminals 5 & 6 to control voltage through the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Start/Stop optional relay output<br />
contact.<br />
4. Start/Stop and Dual Adj bits, should be of maintained type, like a toggle switch.<br />
5. Reset bit should be of momentary type, like a momentary reset pushbutton. It is rejected, if<br />
given together with Start command.<br />
6. Before (or simultaneously with) resetting, be sure to turn off start/stop relay bit first.<br />
7. It is the host responsibility, to immediately write a Stop command (writing 5A00 Hex) when<br />
detecting that the Trip bit is set in the Logic Status parameter (parameter # 1 on the In data).<br />
This is to prevent unwanted start command upon resetting the fault.<br />
Example 5 - Control Register Write:<br />
To start <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN # 11, the host computer sends the following Query frame:<br />
byte 1: Serial Link No. ($0B)<br />
byte 2: Function ($10) Bytes 2..8 must be as in this example!!!<br />
byte 3: Starting Address High ($02)<br />
byte 4: Starting Address Low ($F0)<br />
byte 5: No. of Registers High ($00)<br />
byte 6: No. of Registers Low ($01)<br />
byte 7: Byte Count ($02)<br />
byte 8: Data High ($5A)<br />
byte 9: Data Low ($08) Bit 3 is set, to start.<br />
byte 10: CRC_Low<br />
($XX)<br />
byte 11: CRC_High<br />
($XX)<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
139 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (ModBus Protocol)<br />
The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN normal response:<br />
byte 1: Serial Link No. ($0B)<br />
byte 2: Function ($10)<br />
byte 3: Starting Address High ($02)<br />
byte 4: Starting Address Low ($F0)<br />
byte 5: No. of Registers High ($00)<br />
byte 6: No. of Registers Low ($01)<br />
byte 7: CRC_Low ($XX)<br />
byte 8: CRC_High ($XX)<br />
16.10 Discrete Commands (Coils, 0x References)<br />
The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN incorporates 16 "Coils", (bit parameters), from which only 3 are operative. The other 13 are<br />
reserved and were incorporated to enable the user to use word (16 bits) type parameters. Coil # is 1"1<br />
based". The actual address is 1 lower than coil #. For example coil #1 is addressed as 0 (00000). Use<br />
functions 5 or 15 to send control commands to the starter.<br />
The coils have the following 0x references:<br />
Coil # Coil Address Use in <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Comment<br />
1 0 Reserved.<br />
2 1 Reserved.<br />
3 2 Reserved.<br />
4 3 Start/Stop Relay Write "1" (ON) to Start / Run.<br />
Write "0" (OFF) to Stop.<br />
5 4 Dual Adjust Write "1" (ON) to turn On.<br />
Write "0" (OFF) to turn Off.<br />
6 5 Reserved.<br />
7 6 Reserved.<br />
8 7 Reset Write "1" (ON) momentarily to Reset.<br />
Rejected, if given together with Start command.<br />
9..16 8..15 Reserved<br />
Example 6 - Read Coils:<br />
To read coils 1..8 status of <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN # 10, the host computer sends the following Query frame:<br />
byte 1: Serial Link No. ($0A)<br />
byte 2: Function ($01)<br />
byte 3: Starting Address High ($00)<br />
byte 4: Starting Address Low ($00)<br />
byte 5: No. of Coils High ($00)<br />
byte 6: No. of Coils Low ($08)<br />
byte 7: CRC_Low ($XX)<br />
byte 8: CRC_High ($XX)<br />
The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN response, when coils 7..0 are OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF:<br />
byte 1: Serial Link No. ($0A)<br />
byte 2: Function ($01)<br />
byte 3: Byte Count ($01)<br />
byte 4: Data (coils 7..0) ($14)<br />
byte 5: CRC_Low ($XX)<br />
byte 6: CRC_High ($XX)<br />
Example 7 - Force Single Coil:<br />
To start the motor controlled by <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN # 1, the host computer writes "1" to the "START/STOP COIL" (coil<br />
4 addressed as 3) .<br />
Note: For Force Single Coil Function, Force Data of $0000 forces "0" = OFF. Force data of $FF00 forces "1"<br />
= ON. The "Query" frame is sent by the host:<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
140 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (ModBus Protocol)<br />
byte 1: Serial Link No. ($01)<br />
byte 2: Function ($05)<br />
byte 3: Coil Address High ($00)<br />
byte 4: Coils address Low ($03) Start/Stop relay<br />
byte 5: Force Data High ($FF) (force ON)<br />
byte 6: Force Data Low ($00)<br />
byte 7: CRC_Low ($XX)<br />
byte 8: CRC_High ($XX)<br />
The normal (if no exception) response:<br />
byte 1: Serial Link No. ($01)<br />
byte 2: Function ($05)<br />
byte 3: Coil Address High ($00)<br />
byte 4: Coils address Low ($03)<br />
byte 5: Force Data High ($FF)<br />
byte 6: Force Data Low ($00)<br />
byte 7: CRC_Low ($XX)<br />
byte 8: CRC_High ($XX)<br />
Notes:<br />
1. Hardwired Stop and Soft Stop inputs, overrides the communication. To enable motor starting through<br />
communication, terminal 4 (Stop) must be connected to the control voltage. Connect Terminals 5 & 6<br />
to control voltage through the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Start/Stop optional relay output contact.<br />
2. Start/Stop coil and Dual Adj coil should be of maintained type, like a toggle switch.<br />
3. Reset coil should be of momentary type, like a momentary reset pushbutton. It is Rejected, if given<br />
together with Start command.<br />
4. Before reseting, be sure to turn off start/stop relay coil first.<br />
5. It is the host responsibility, to immediately write a Stop command when detecting that the Trip bit is set<br />
in the Logic_Status parameter (parameter # 1 in the Actual data). This is to prevent unwanted start<br />
command upon resetting the fault.<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
141 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (ModBus Protocol)<br />
Example 8 - Force Multiple coils:<br />
Motor that is controlled by <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN # 32 is stopped. Dual Adjust is set to off.<br />
To start the motor using the Dual Adjust parameters , the host computer writes "1" to the Start and Dual Adjust<br />
Coils no. 4 &5, addressed as 3 & 4. One of the many possible ways:<br />
The "Query" frame sent by the host:<br />
byte 1: Serial Link No. ($20)<br />
byte 2: Function ($0F)<br />
byte 3: Coil Address High ($00)<br />
byte 4: Coils address Low ($00)<br />
byte 5: No. of Coils High ($00)<br />
byte 6: No. of coils Low ($08)<br />
byte 7: Byte Count ($01)<br />
byte 8: Force Data ($18) (coil # 4 & coil # 5)<br />
byte 9: CRC_Low ($XX)<br />
byte 10: CRC_High<br />
($XX)<br />
The normal (if no exception) response:<br />
byte 1: Serial Link No. ($20)<br />
byte 2: Function ($0F)<br />
byte 3: Coil Address High ($00)<br />
byte 4: Coils address Low ($00)<br />
byte 5: No. of Coils High ($00)<br />
byte 6: No. of coils Low ($08)<br />
byte 7: CRC_Low ($XX)<br />
byte 8: CRC_High ($XX)<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
142 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (ModBus Protocol)<br />
16.11 Discrete Hardwired Inputs (1x References)<br />
The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN incorporates 16 Discrete Inputs, (bit parameters), from which only 6 are operative. The other<br />
10 are reserved and were incorporated to enable use of word (16 bits) type parameters. Input # is "1 based".<br />
The actual address is 1 lower than input #. For example input #1 is addressed as 0 (10000). The inputs have<br />
the following 1x references:<br />
Input #<br />
Address <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN use Comment<br />
1 0 Stop Open Input (Input reads" 0") to Stop. (Terminal # 4)<br />
Close Input (Input reads "1") to enable Start / Run.<br />
2 1 Soft Stop Open Input (Input reads"0") to Soft Stop. (Terminal # 5)<br />
Close Input (Input reads"1") to enable Start / Run.<br />
3 2 Start Close Input (Input reads "1") to Start. (Terminal # 6)<br />
4 3 Input # 1 Close Input (Input reads "1") to turn On. (Terminal # 7)<br />
Open Input (Input reads "0") to turn Off.<br />
Programmable to: 0- Test1<br />
1- Slow Speed<br />
2- Reset<br />
5 4 Input # 2 Close Input (Input reads "1") to turn On. (Terminal # 8)<br />
Open Input (Input reads "0") to turn Off.<br />
Programmable to: 0- Dual Adjust<br />
1- S. Spd Rvrs<br />
2- Reset<br />
6 5 Reserved<br />
7 6 Ext. Fault 1 Close to Trip (Input reads" 1") (Terminal # 19)<br />
8 7 Ext. Fault 2 Close to Trip (Input reads" 1") (Terminal # 20)<br />
9..16 8..15 Reserved<br />
Example 9:<br />
To read all discrete inputs of <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN # 12, the host computer sends the following Query frame:<br />
byte 1: Serial Link No. ($0C) (12)<br />
byte 2: Function ($02)<br />
byte 3: Starting Address High ($00)<br />
byte 4: Starting Address Low ($00)<br />
byte 5: No. of Points High ($00)<br />
byte 6: No. of points Low ($08)<br />
byte 7: CRC_Low ($XX)<br />
byte 8: CRC_High ($XX)<br />
The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN response, when only Stop and Soft Stop terminals (Inputs 1&2) are connected:<br />
byte 1: Serial Link No. ($0C) (12)<br />
byte 2: Function ($02)<br />
byte 3: Byte Count ($01)<br />
byte 4: Data (Inputs 7..0) ($03)<br />
byte 5: CRC_Low ($XX)<br />
byte 6: CRC_High ($XX)<br />
16.12 Diagnostics<br />
Modbus Function 08 , as implemented in the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN supports only Subfunction $0000. It provides for<br />
"loopback" (Return Query Data) feature, for checking the Communication Serial Link between the master and<br />
the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN.<br />
To request <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN # 1 to return Query data, the master should send following Query frame:<br />
byte 1: Serial Link No. ($01)<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
143 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (ModBus Protocol)<br />
byte 2: Function ($08)<br />
byte 3: Subfunction High ($00)<br />
byte 4: Subfunction Low ($00)<br />
byte 5: Data High ($37)<br />
byte 6: Data Low ($A5)<br />
byte 7: CRC_Low ($XX)<br />
byte 8: CRC_High ($XX)<br />
The normal (if no exception) response is the echo of the Query:<br />
byte 1: Serial Link No. ($01)<br />
byte 2: Function ($08)<br />
byte 3: Subfunction High ($00)<br />
byte 4: Subfunction Low ($00)<br />
byte 5: Force Data High ($37)<br />
byte 6: Force Data Low ($A5)<br />
byte 7: CRC_Low ($XX)<br />
byte 8: CRC_High ($XX)<br />
16.13 Exception Responses<br />
When the master sends a query frame to an <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN, one of the following four responses from the <strong>HRVS</strong>-<br />
DN is possible:<br />
1. When no communication error is detected in the query, and no mistake is found by the communication<br />
program module in the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN, a normal response is returned.<br />
2. If the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN does not receive the query frame (for example because of disconnected serial link cable)<br />
then no response is returned by the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN. After proper time the master will cause a timeout condition.<br />
3. If the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN receives the query, but faulty CRC bytes and / or Parity bits are detected, no response is<br />
returned by the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN. After the proper time the master will cause a timeout condition.<br />
4. If no communication error is detected in the query, but the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN communication program module<br />
finds an error such as illegal Function, data address or data value, or if the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN is busy, then an<br />
Exception response is returned. The Exception response includes Exception Code to inform the master<br />
about the type of the error.<br />
Exception Code Response Frame:<br />
The Exception response frame holds fix number of 5 bytes. The first one, the Slave Address field is the Serial<br />
link number (transmitted in query and identical to <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Serial Link No.). The second byte, the Function<br />
field returns the echo of the transmitted query function, but with the Most Significant Bit set to 1 (adding $80 to<br />
the transmitted function code). The third byte is the Exception Code informing about the type of error. The last<br />
two bytes are the CRC bytes.<br />
Exception Codes supported by the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN:<br />
Exception Code Type Comment<br />
01 Illegal Function Requested Function is not supported.<br />
Functions 1..6, 8, 15 or 16 are supported.<br />
02 Illegal Data Address Data address is not allowable.<br />
03 Illegal Data Value Data Value is not in allowable range.<br />
06 <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Busy <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN is busy now. The master retransmits the message<br />
later.<br />
Note: After using function 16 to store setting parameters, it is<br />
forbidden to transmit again to the same MPR after less than<br />
1Sec.<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
144 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (ModBus Protocol)<br />
Example 10:<br />
The master is trying to force coil # 17 of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN 32. The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN incorporates only 16 coils. The<br />
Illegal Data Address Exception code will be returned:<br />
Query:<br />
byte 1: Serial Link No. ($20) (32)<br />
byte 2: Function ($05)<br />
byte 3: Coil Address High ($00)<br />
byte 4: Coils address Low ($11) (17, Non existent Coil)<br />
byte 5: Force Data High ($00) ($0000 = "0" = Low)<br />
byte 6: Force Data Low ($00)<br />
byte 7: CRC_Low ($XX)<br />
byte 8: CRC_High ($XX)<br />
Exception response:<br />
byte 1: Serial Link No. ($20)<br />
byte 2: Function ($85) (Original + $80)<br />
byte 3: Exception Code ($02) (Illegal Data Address)<br />
byte 4: CRC_Low ($XX)<br />
byte 5: CRC_High ($XX)<br />
Note:<br />
There are cases where the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN returns Normal response, but the requested action cannot be<br />
performed, or is modified by the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN. Few examples are:<br />
Requested Action<br />
Write Parameter settings during start process<br />
Write multiple parameters (Function 16), some are out of range<br />
Performed Action<br />
Ignored.<br />
Limit to allowed range.<br />
Start command (Function 05) while Stop Hardwired Input is open Command ignored<br />
It is the user responsibility to verify that the requested action was performed, by reading the value of the<br />
modified parameters or the status of the command Coils.<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
145 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (Profibus protocol)<br />
17. <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN COMMUNICATION (PROFIBUS PROTOCOL)<br />
17.1 Global Parameters:<br />
33: ;=============================================<br />
34: ;==== General DP Keywords ====================<br />
35: ;=============================================<br />
36:<br />
37: GSD_Revision = 5<br />
38: Vendor_Name = "Solcon Ltd"<br />
39: Model_Name = "<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN"<br />
40: Revision = "1.00"<br />
41: Ident_Number = 0x0BAB<br />
42: Protocol_Ident = 0<br />
43: Station_Type = 0<br />
44: FMS_supp = 0<br />
45: Hardware_Release = "V1.00"<br />
46: Software_Release = "V1.00"<br />
47: Redundancy = 0<br />
48: Repeater_Ctrl_Sig = 2<br />
49: 24V_Pins = 0<br />
Code 1 – Global Parameters in the GSD file<br />
17.2 Operation Mode in PROFIBUS:<br />
<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN supports both DPV0 and DPV1.<br />
• DPV0 (Cyclic) allows:<br />
o Start and shutdown.<br />
o Read parameters (write parameters are not allowed via DPV0).<br />
• DPV1 allows:<br />
o Everything that DPV0 allows<br />
o Change the cyclic parameters that display via DPV0.<br />
o Write to registers.<br />
17.3 Description of the DPV0 (Cyclic) Frame:<br />
From the Profibus controller to the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN two bytes (16 bits) are transferred.<br />
From the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN to the controller 40 bytes are transferred.<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
146 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (Profibus protocol)<br />
Receiving from<br />
the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN<br />
Sending to the<br />
<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN<br />
Figure 51 – DPV0 parameters (Cyclic parameters)<br />
17.3.1 Structure of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Receiving Frame<br />
The first byte must to be 0x5A (90 decimal)<br />
The second byte is as follows:<br />
Bit number: Function: Note:<br />
0 Reserved<br />
1 Reserved<br />
2 Reserved<br />
3 Start/Stop Relay<br />
Write "1" (ON) to Start / Run.<br />
Note:<br />
Bit number 0 is the LSB.<br />
4 Dual Adjust<br />
Write "0" (OFF) to Stop.<br />
Write "1" (ON) to turn On.<br />
Write "0" (OFF) to turn Off.<br />
5 Reserved<br />
6 Reserved<br />
7 Reset Write ‘1’ for reset<br />
Example:<br />
To send Reset, you first need to send 0x5A followed by 0x80.<br />
17.3.2 Structure of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Transmitting Frame<br />
The return frame contains 20 pairs of bytes (40 bytes total), representing the contents of 20 registers.<br />
Each pair of bytes represents one register; all of the registers are 16 bit numbers.<br />
The first byte represents the high value of the number (the MSB).<br />
17.3.3 Choosing the Receiving DPV0 Registers<br />
There are two methods to change which registers will be displayed in DPV0 (cyclic).<br />
• Change the parameters in the GSD file. This method can be used with both DPV0 and DPV1. The change<br />
can only take place when communication is first established.<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
147 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (Profibus protocol)<br />
• Write a data request. This method can only be used with DPV1. The change can be made after<br />
communication has already been established.<br />
17.3.3.1 Selection of the DPV0 Registers by the GSD<br />
The GSD file contains a list of parameters at lines 190 to 288.<br />
The parameters appear in blocks, each block contains 4 lines, and each block refers to one register (there are<br />
20 blocks representing 20 registers).<br />
190: ExtUserPrmData = 1001 "INDIREC PAR 1"<br />
191: Unsigned16 1 1-1000<br />
192: Prm_text_Ref = 100<br />
193: EndExtUserPrmData<br />
194:<br />
196: ExtUserPrmData = 1002 "INDIREC PAR 2"<br />
197: Unsigned16 2 1-1000<br />
198: Prm_text_Ref = 100<br />
199: EndExtUserPrmData<br />
200:<br />
201: ExtUserPrmData = 1003 "INDIREC PAR 3"<br />
202: Unsigned16 3 1-1000<br />
203: Prm_text_Ref = 100<br />
204: EndExtUserPrmData<br />
205:<br />
………………<br />
………………<br />
284:<br />
285: ExtUserPrmData = 1020 "INDIREC PAR 20"<br />
286: Unsigned16 40 1-1000<br />
287: Prm_text_Ref = 100<br />
288: EndExtUserPrmdata<br />
Code 2 – GSD file, the part that is responsible for displaying the registers in DPV0 (cyclic)<br />
The second line of each block begins with “Unsigned16”, followed by the register number (shown above in<br />
green).<br />
The list of register numbers appears in section Error! Reference source not found. on page Error!<br />
Bookmark not defined..<br />
17.3.3.2 Selection of the DPV0 Registers through Data Request (DPV1)<br />
By writing to Slot number 1 and Index 2, you can change the register that appears in DPV0.<br />
Remember that for each register there are 16 bits (two bytes/one word). The first byte represents the high<br />
value of the register number.<br />
To demonstrate this, let’s say that we want to see the following registers in DPV0 (cyclic):<br />
1. Logic Status.<br />
2. I1.<br />
3. I2.<br />
4. I3.<br />
5. Voltage.<br />
6. Ctrl-In.<br />
7. Ctrl_Out (relays).<br />
8. Power.<br />
9. Power Factor.<br />
10. Frequency.<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
148 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (Profibus protocol)<br />
Step 1: Find the register numbers<br />
In this document, we will use a simple PROFIBUS master tool to demonstrate how to change parameters.<br />
This tool is very simple and it allows you to modify the parameters only by writing the hex numbers.<br />
Go to the table in section Error! Reference source not found. and find the register number for each register.<br />
The tool used in our example requires the hexadecimal value so we also need to convert the register number<br />
into its hex equivalent.<br />
The following table shows the register numbers for the registers used in our example.<br />
Register name Decimal number Hex number<br />
Logic Status 1 00 01<br />
I1 5 00 02<br />
I2 6 00 05<br />
I3 7 00 07<br />
Voltage 4 00 04<br />
Ctrl-In 2 00 02<br />
Ctrl_Out (relays) 3 00 03<br />
Power 15 00 0F<br />
Power Factor 17 00 11<br />
Frequency 8 00 08<br />
Step 2: Update the register numbers<br />
In the Data Request area defines the following:<br />
• Slot Number = 1<br />
• Index = 2<br />
• Operation = Write<br />
• Write Data (hex) = the hex numbers in the table above<br />
This updates the registers that are shown in DPV0.<br />
Write<br />
Figure 52 – Updating the register number that will show at DPV0 (by Data Request)<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
17.3.3.3 Reading of the DPV0 (Cyclic) Registers via Data Request (DPV1)<br />
In the Data Request areas define the following:<br />
• Slot Number = 1<br />
• Index = 2<br />
• Operation = Read<br />
The registers in DPV0 will display in the Read Data (hex) field.<br />
149 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (Profibus protocol)<br />
Read<br />
Figure 53 – Reading the register number that is shown in the DPV0 (cyclic) list<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
150 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (Profibus protocol)<br />
17.4 Operations that are Available in DPV1<br />
• Choose the registers that will display in DPV0 (cyclic). This was described in the previous section.<br />
• Read and write from random registers.<br />
17.4.1 Read and Write from Random Registers via Data Request<br />
Reading or writing by Data Request (DPV1) allows you to read or write up to 20 registers in a single request.<br />
In order to read or write via Data Request (DPV1) you need to perform 2 operations:<br />
• First update the first register number that we want to read or write.<br />
• Second read or write the register.<br />
To configure the first register number, define the following:<br />
• Slot Number = 1<br />
• Index = 2<br />
• Operation = Write<br />
• Write Data (hex) = the first register number<br />
The length of the register number must always contain two bytes (word). If we want to read from register<br />
number 5 we need to read from register number 0x0005. The first byte is the high part of the number (the<br />
MSB).<br />
To read or write multiple registers, we need to define the number of the words that we want to read or write.<br />
The following example shows how to read from register number 0x80 to register number 0x83.<br />
Step 1: Write the number 80 hex to Slot number 2 and Index number 2.<br />
Write to<br />
Slot: 2<br />
Index: 2<br />
Register<br />
number 80 hex<br />
Figure 54 – Choosing register number 80 hex<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
151 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (Profibus protocol)<br />
Step 2: Read from Slot number 3 and Index number 2<br />
The following eight bytes are displayed: Register number 0x80 , Register number 0x81, Register number 0x82<br />
and Register number 0x83 (4 words = 8 bytes total)<br />
Read from<br />
Slot: 3<br />
Index: 2<br />
8 byte – (4<br />
Registers)<br />
Figure 55 – Reading 4 following register by Data Request (DPV1)<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
152 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (Profibus protocol)<br />
17.5 Configure the PROFIBUS in the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN<br />
All the settings to establish PROFIBUS communication are located under the Communication menu. Follow<br />
the steps below to define the PROFIBUS in the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN .<br />
1. Press the MODE button until the following message appears:<br />
COMM. PARAMETERS<br />
- **** -<br />
2. Press SELECT one time and the following message will appear:<br />
COMM. PROTOCOL<br />
PROFIBUS<br />
In this menu, use the up/down arrows to define that the communication will be PROFIBUS.<br />
3. Press SELECT again and the following message will appear:<br />
BAUD RATE<br />
AUTO (PROFIBUS)<br />
4. Press SELECT again and the following message will appear:<br />
PARITY CHECK<br />
AUTO (PROFIBUS)<br />
5. Press SELECT again and the following message will appear:<br />
PROFI.NETWORK ID<br />
3<br />
In this menu, use the up/down arrows to define the PROFIBUS Address of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN.<br />
6. Press SELECT again and the following message will appear:<br />
S.LINK PAR. SAVE<br />
ENABLE<br />
In this menu, use the up/down arrows to define whether to enable/disable writing of parameters via<br />
the PROFIBUS.<br />
7. Press SELECT again and the following message will appear:<br />
SER.LINK CONTROL<br />
ENABLE<br />
In this menu, use the up/down arrows to define whether to enable/disable control via the<br />
PROFIBUS.<br />
8. Press SELECT again a number of times until the following message appears:<br />
Store Settings<br />
COMM. Parameters<br />
Pressing the STORE button stores the parameters in the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN memory.<br />
17.6 Watch Dog Definition<br />
The Watch-Dog mechanism can be enabled or disabled only via the PROFIBUS controller.<br />
When the Watch-Dog is enabled, the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN will stop the motor when there is a break in<br />
communication between the controller and the device.<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
153 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (Profibus protocol)<br />
17.7 Numbers of actual data Register for (decimal)<br />
Number Parameter Name Description<br />
Logic status of <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN. 1 indicates:<br />
d15: <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Tripped.<br />
d14: Motor Stopped.<br />
d13: Motor in Soft Stop Process.<br />
d12: Motor in Start Process.<br />
d11: Motor is Running.<br />
d10: Motor is running with Closed By_Pass.<br />
1 Logic Status<br />
d9: Up_To_Speed. Like d10 and I reduced (once) below 115% of<br />
FLA.<br />
d8: Reserved.<br />
d7: Dual_Adjust On.<br />
d6..d0: Reserved.<br />
Note: After by-pass is closed, trip (d15) and running (d11), can be ON<br />
together. See Trip_after_By-Pass setting parameter at fault parameters<br />
page.<br />
Discrete Hardwired control inputs:<br />
d15..d8: Reserved.<br />
d7: External fault 2, Terminal 20.<br />
d6: External Fault 1,Terminal 19.<br />
2 Hardwired inputs<br />
d5: Reserved.<br />
d4: Programmable Input , Terminal 8<br />
d3: Programmable Input, Terminal 7<br />
d2: Start Input. Terminal 6<br />
d1: Soft Stop Input. Terminal 5<br />
d0: Stop Input. Terminal 4<br />
3 Relays d0 - Immediate, d1- End Of Acc, d2 - Fault relay<br />
4 Voltage Line voltage, % of rated voltage.<br />
5 I1_amp Current of phase 1, Ampere.<br />
6 I2_amp Current of phase 2, Ampere.<br />
7 I3_amp Current of phase 3, Ampere.<br />
8 Reserved<br />
d15..d8: Reserved.<br />
d7: Setting Lock - (right-most)<br />
d6: Enlarged Setting Ranges<br />
d5: Language Selection.<br />
9 Dip_Switch<br />
d4: Language Selection.<br />
d3: Reserved - Must be set to Off.<br />
d2: Generator Starting - Set to Off.<br />
d1: Tacho feedback available (1).<br />
d0: Min (off) / Max display pages- (left most)<br />
10 Phase_Sequence 1: Correct Phase seq. 0 : Wrong Phase Seq.<br />
11 Motor Insulation R Motor Insulation Resistance [KOhm]<br />
12 Reserved<br />
13 Reserved<br />
14 Reserved<br />
15 Power Power consumption [KW]<br />
16 Reactive Power Reactive Power consumption [KVAR]<br />
17 Power Factor Power Factor * 100<br />
18 Time Since Last Start Elapsed minutes since last start<br />
19 Frequency Frequency [tenth Hz]<br />
20 Reserved<br />
21 Reserved<br />
22 Reserved<br />
23 Reserved<br />
24 Reserved<br />
25<br />
Logic Status at Power<br />
Fail<br />
Logic Status at Control Pwr Supply turn off.<br />
26 Total Run Time Total Hours of Running Motor.<br />
27 Total Starts Total Number Of Start<br />
28 Last start period Duration of last start, Seconds<br />
29 Last start peak I Peak current during last starting process<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
154 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (Profibus protocol)<br />
Number Parameter Name Description<br />
30 Time to start After too many starts trip, Seconds<br />
31 Total trips Total number of trips<br />
# of the fault that caused trip.<br />
# Fault<br />
01: Over Temperature<br />
02: Over current / Shear pin<br />
03: Overload<br />
04: Under Current<br />
05: Under / No Voltage<br />
06: Over Voltage<br />
07: Phase Loss<br />
08: Phase Sequence<br />
09: Wrong Connection or Shorted SCR.<br />
10: Long Start Time<br />
32 Last trip number 11: Set Curve to 0<br />
12: External Fault 1 (Input # 3)<br />
13: External Fault 2 (Input # 4)<br />
14: Wrong Parameters<br />
15: Mains ON & No Start Signal<br />
16: Too Many Starts<br />
17: Currents Unbalance<br />
18: Insulation<br />
19: Ground Fault<br />
20: Open By-Pass<br />
21: Frequency out of range<br />
22: Comm Port Failure<br />
23: Set Clock<br />
33 Pre Trip Current at trip time, % of FLA<br />
34 Reserved<br />
35 Reserved<br />
36 Reserved<br />
37 Reserved<br />
38 Reserved<br />
39 Thermal Capacity Simulated winding temperature, %. 100% = trip<br />
40 Reserved<br />
41 Clk Hour Setting can be done at setting # 130<br />
42 Clk Minute Setting can be done at setting # 131<br />
43 Clk Month Setting can be done at setting # 132<br />
44 Clk Date Setting can be done at setting # 133<br />
45 Clk Year Setting can be done at setting # 134<br />
46 Reserved<br />
47 KWH_LS KWH dword parameter: LS word<br />
48 KWH_MS KWH dword parameter: MS word<br />
49 KVARH_ LS KVARH dword parameter: LS word<br />
50 KVARH_MS KVARH dword parameter: MS word<br />
51 Reserved<br />
52 Reserved<br />
53 Reserved<br />
54 Reserved<br />
55 Reserved<br />
56 Reserved<br />
57 Trip Array 1 List of last 10 Trip<br />
58 Trip Array 2 List of last 10 Trip<br />
59 Trip Array 3 List of last 10 Trip<br />
60 Trip Array 4 List of last 10 Trip<br />
61 Trip Array 5 List of last 10 Trip<br />
62 Trip Array 6 List of last 10 Trip<br />
63 Trip Array 7 List of last 10 Trip<br />
64 Trip Array 8 List of last 10 Trip<br />
65 Trip Array 9 List of last 10 Trip<br />
66 Trip Array 10 List of last 10 Trip<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
155 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (Profibus protocol)<br />
Number Parameter Name Description<br />
67 Trip Hour Array 1 List of time (Hour) of last 10 trips<br />
68 Trip Hour Array 2 List of time (Hour) of last 10 trips<br />
69 Trip Hour Array 3 List of time (Hour) of last 10 trips<br />
70 Trip Hour Array 4 List of time (Hour) of last 10 trips<br />
71 Trip Hour Array 5 List of time (Hour) of last 10 trips<br />
72 Trip Hour Array 6 List of time (Hour) of last 10 trips<br />
73 Trip Hour Array 7 List of time (Hour) of last 10 trips<br />
74 Trip Hour Array 8 List of time (Hour) of last 10 trips<br />
75 Trip Hour Array 9 List of time (Hour) of last 10 trips<br />
76 Trip Hour Array 10 List of time (Hour) of last 10 trips<br />
77 Trip Minute Array 1 List of time (Hour) of last 10 trips<br />
78 Trip Minute Array 2 List of time (Hour) of last 10 trips<br />
79 Trip Minute Array 3 List of time (Hour) of last 10 trips<br />
80 Trip Minute Array 4 List of time (Hour) of last 10 trips<br />
81 Trip Minute Array 5 List of time (Hour) of last 10 trips<br />
82 Trip Minute Array 6 List of time (Hour) of last 10 trips<br />
83 Trip Minute Array 7 List of time (Hour) of last 10 trips<br />
84 Trip Minute Array 8 List of time (Hour) of last 10 trips<br />
85 Trip Minute Array 9 List of time (Hour) of last 10 trips<br />
86 Trip Minute Array 10 List of time (Hour) of last 10 trips<br />
87 Trip Date Array 1 List of date (day) of the last 10 trips<br />
88 Trip Date Array 2 List of date (day) of the last 10 trips<br />
89 Trip Date Array 3 List of date (day) of the last 10 trips<br />
90 Trip Date Array 4 List of date (day) of the last 10 trips<br />
91 Trip Date Array 5 List of date (day) of the last 10 trips<br />
92 Trip Date Array 6 List of date (day) of the last 10 trips<br />
93 Trip Date Array 7 List of date (day) of the last 10 trips<br />
94 Trip Date Array 8 List of date (day) of the last 10 trips<br />
95 Trip Date Array 9 List of date (day) of the last 10 trips<br />
96 Trip Date Array 10 List of date (day) of the last 10 trips<br />
97 Trip Month Array 1 List of date (Month) of the last 10 trips<br />
98 Trip Month Array 2 List of date (Month) of the last 10 trips<br />
99 Trip Month Array 3 List of date (Month) of the last 10 trips<br />
100 Trip Month Array 4 List of date (Month) of the last 10 trips<br />
101 Trip Month Array 5 List of date (Month) of the last 10 trips<br />
102 Trip Month Array 6 List of date (Month) of the last 10 trips<br />
103 Trip Month Array 7 List of date (Month) of the last 10 trips<br />
104 Trip Month Array 8 List of date (Month) of the last 10 trips<br />
105 Trip Month Array 9 List of date (Month) of the last 10 trips<br />
106 Trip Month Array 10 List of date (Month) of the last 10 trips<br />
107 Trip Year Array 1 List of date (Year) of the last 10 trips<br />
108 Trip Year Array 2 List of date (Year) of the last 10 trips<br />
109 Trip Year Array 3 List of date (Year) of the last 10 trips<br />
110 Trip Year Array 4 List of date (Year) of the last 10 trips<br />
111 Trip Year Array 5 List of date (Year) of the last 10 trips<br />
112 Trip Year Array 6 List of date (Year) of the last 10 trips<br />
113 Trip Year Array 7 List of date (Year) of the last 10 trips<br />
114 Trip Year Array 8 List of date (Year) of the last 10 trips<br />
115 Trip Year Array 9 List of date (Year) of the last 10 trips<br />
116 Trip Year Array 10 List of date (Year) of the last 10 trips<br />
117 Trip Pointer Pointer of the 10 cyclic above arrays<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
156 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (Profibus protocol)<br />
Number Parameter Name Description<br />
118-150 Reserved<br />
151 Actual_Data_Group_1 Group of 20 actual parameters selected by setting parameters 90..109.<br />
152 Actual_Data_Group_2 Group of 20 actual parameters selected by setting parameters 90..109.<br />
153 Actual_Data_Group_3 Group of 20 actual parameters selected by setting parameters 90..109.<br />
154 Actual_Data_Group_4 Group of 20 actual parameters selected by setting parameters 90..109.<br />
155 Actual_Data_Group_5 Group of 20 actual parameters selected by setting parameters 90..109.<br />
156 Actual_Data_Group_6 Group of 20 actual parameters selected by setting parameters 90..109.<br />
157 Actual_Data_Group_7 Group of 20 actual parameters selected by setting parameters 90..109.<br />
158 Actual_Data_Group_8 Group of 20 actual parameters selected by setting parameters 90..109.<br />
159 Actual_Data_Group_9 Group of 20 actual parameters selected by setting parameters 90..109.<br />
160 Actual_Data_Group_10 Group of 20 actual parameters selected by setting parameters 90..109.<br />
161 Actual_Data_Group_11 Group of 20 actual parameters selected by setting parameters 90..109.<br />
162 Actual_Data_Group_12 Group of 20 actual parameters selected by setting parameters 90..109.<br />
163 Actual_Data_Group_13 Group of 20 actual parameters selected by setting parameters 90..109.<br />
164 Actual_Data_Group_14 Group of 20 actual parameters selected by setting parameters 90..109.<br />
165 Actual_Data_Group_15 Group of 20 actual parameters selected by setting parameters 90..109.<br />
166 Actual_Data_Group_16 Group of 20 actual parameters selected by setting parameters 90..109.<br />
167 Actual_Data_Group_17 Group of 20 actual parameters selected by setting parameters 90..109.<br />
168 Actual_Data_Group_18 Group of 20 actual parameters selected by setting parameters 90..109.<br />
169 Actual_Data_Group_19 Group of 20 actual parameters selected by setting parameters 90..109.<br />
170 Actual_Data_Group_20 Group of 20 actual parameters selected by setting parameters 90..109.<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
17.8 Number of Setting Registers for Data Request<br />
17.8.1 Main & protect. parameters<br />
157 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (Profibus protocol)<br />
Parameter # Range Default<br />
Rated Line Voltage 0 6600..15000 6600 (Volt.)<br />
Starter FLC 1 20..1800 150 (Amp.)<br />
Motor FLA 2 20..1800 150 (Amp.)<br />
Rated Motor Power 3 50..40000 1000 (KW)<br />
Service Factor 4 100..130 (% of FLA) 100 (%)<br />
Undercurrent Trip 5 0..90 0 (% of FLA)<br />
Undercurrent Delay 6 1..40 10 (Seconds)<br />
Overcurrent Shear Pin 7 100..850 850 (% of FLA)<br />
Overcurrent Delay 8 0..50 5 (0.5 Sec.)<br />
Overload Class 9<br />
IEC 5,10,15,20,25,30<br />
NEMA 5,10,15,20,25,30 FLA)<br />
IEC Class 10<br />
Overload Protect 10<br />
0=Disable<br />
1=Enable While Run<br />
1=Enable While Run<br />
2=Enable<br />
Unbalance Trip 11 10..100, 101 = Off 20 (%)<br />
Unbalance Delay 12 1..60 5 (Seconds)<br />
Ground Fault Trip 13 10..100, 101 = Off 20 (% of FLA)<br />
Ground Fault Delay 14 1..60 5 (Seconds)<br />
Undervoltage Trip 15 50..90 70 (%)<br />
Undervoltage Delay 16 1..100 5 (Seconds)<br />
Overvoltage Trip 17 110..125, 126 (=off) 120 (%)<br />
Overvoltage Delay 18 1..10 2 (Seconds)<br />
Reserved 20..24<br />
17.9 Start Parameters<br />
Parameter # Range Default<br />
Soft_Start_Curve 24<br />
0..11 (6..11 are for Tacho<br />
only)<br />
1 (Standard).<br />
Pulse Level 25 70 (%of FLA) – 700 (%of FLA) 70% of FLA<br />
Pulse Time 26 0..10 (Tenth Seconds) 0 (No Pulse)<br />
Initial Voltage /<br />
10..80 /<br />
30 (% of full voltage) /<br />
27<br />
Initial Current<br />
100..400 % (of FLA)<br />
100 (% of FLA)<br />
Current Limit 28 100..700 400 (% of FLA)<br />
Acceleration Time 29 1..90 10 (Seconds)<br />
Max. Start Time 30 1..250 30 (Seconds)<br />
Number Of Starts 31 1..10 & (11 = off) 1<br />
Starts_Period 32 1..60 20 (Minutes)<br />
Start Inhibit 33 1..60 minutes 15 (Minutes)<br />
Run Contact Delay /<br />
Turn Bypass On at<br />
34<br />
Min Time To Bypass 35 3..60<br />
Reserved 36..39<br />
17.10 Stop Parameters<br />
0..120 minutes /<br />
121..250 % of Motor FLA<br />
5 (Seconds) /<br />
Only with relay card for<br />
optional sync motor start<br />
3 Sec<br />
Only with relay card for<br />
optional sync motor start<br />
Parameter # Range Default<br />
Soft_Stop_Curve 40 0..11 (6..11 are for Tacho only) 1 (Standard)<br />
Deceleration_Time 41 0..90 0 (Seconds)<br />
Final_Torque 42 0..10 0 (Minimum)<br />
Reserved 43..47<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
158 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (Profibus protocol)<br />
17.11 Dual Adjust Parameters<br />
Parameter # Range Default<br />
DA Initial Voltage /<br />
10..80 % of full voltage / 30 /<br />
48<br />
DA Initial Current<br />
100..400 % of FLA<br />
100 % of FLA<br />
DA Current Limit 49 100..700 400 % of FLA<br />
DA Acceleration Time 50 1..90 10 (Seconds)<br />
DA Deceleration Time 51 0..90 0 (Seconds)<br />
DA Motor FLA 52 20..1800 150 (Amp.)<br />
Reserved 53..55<br />
17.12 Fault Parameters<br />
Parameter # Range Default<br />
UV & PL Auto_Reset 56 0..1 (0 - No, 1 - Yes) 0 (No)<br />
Under_Current_Reset 57 10..120 (&121=off) 121 (Off)<br />
By-Pass_Open_Trip 58 0 / 1 (0 – Disable,1 - Enable) 1 (Enable)<br />
Trip_after_By-Pass 59 0 / 1 (0 – Disable,1 - Enable) 1 (Enable)<br />
By-Pass_Auto_Reset 60 0 – No, 1 – Yes 0 (No)<br />
Set_Curve_To_0 61 0 / 1 (0 – Disable,1 - Enable) 1 (Enable)<br />
Power On & No Start 62 0 / 1 (0 – Disable,1 - Enable) 1 (Enable)<br />
Insulation_Alarm 63 1(Off) – 100 (10 Mohm) 1 (Off)<br />
Insulation_Trip 64 1(Off) – 100 (10 Mohm) 1 (Off)<br />
Phase Sequence 65 0 – Pos., 1 – Neg., 2 – Ignore 0 (Positive)<br />
Reserved 66..71<br />
17.13 I/O Programming<br />
Parameter # Range Default<br />
Prog. Input #7 (thermal 7) 72<br />
0..3<br />
0 – Test<br />
1 – Reset<br />
2 – Multi Soft Stop - consult the 1 (Reset)<br />
factory<br />
3 – Current Control - consult the<br />
factory<br />
Prog. Input #8 (thermal 8) 73 0..1 (0=D.Adj.,1=Reset) 0 (Dual Adjust)<br />
Fault Relay Type 74 0..1 (0=Fault, 1=Fault-Fail Safe) 0 (Fault)<br />
Immediate Realy Type 75 0..1 (0=Immediate, 1=shear pin) 0 (Immediate)<br />
Realy On Delay 76 0..3600 0 (Seconds)<br />
Realy Off Delay 77 0..3600 0 (Seconds)<br />
Analog output 78 0..1 (0 - Normal, 1 - Inverted) 0 (Normal)<br />
Reserved 79<br />
17.14 Communication Parameters<br />
Parameter # Range Default<br />
Comm. Protocol 80 0 – Modbus, 1-Profibus 1 – Profibus<br />
Modbus Baud Rate 81 12..96 (*100) 192 (19200 bps)<br />
Parity Check 82 0/1/2 (Even / Odd / No) 0 (Even)<br />
Profibus_Network 83 0..126 (0-Off) 0 (Off)<br />
S. Link Parameters Save 84 0 (Disable), 1 (Enable) 0 (Disable saving)<br />
Ser. Link Control 85 0 (Disable), 1 (Enable) 0 (Disable control)<br />
Front Com Adress 86 1..247 & (248= Off) 248 (Off)<br />
Reserved 87..88<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
159 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (Profibus protocol)<br />
Parameter # Range Default<br />
Defaults # are:<br />
1 - Logic Status<br />
5 – I1<br />
6 – I2<br />
7 – I3<br />
4 – Voltage<br />
2 – Ctrl-In<br />
3 – Ctrl_Out (relays)<br />
15 – Power<br />
17 – Power Factor<br />
Modbus_#_Array<br />
89..108 # of parameter<br />
19 – Frequency<br />
10 – Phase Sequence<br />
26 – Total Run Time<br />
27 – Total Starts<br />
31 – Total Trips<br />
28 – Last Start Period<br />
29 – Last Start Peak I<br />
32 – Last Trip Number<br />
33 – Pre Trip I<br />
39 – Thermal Capacity<br />
11 – Insulation Resistance<br />
17.15 Time Parameters<br />
Parameter # Range Default<br />
Clk Hour 130 0 – 23 Set here, Read at actual # 41<br />
Clk Minute 131 0 – 59 Set here, Read at actual # 42<br />
Clk Month 132 1 – 12 Set here, Read at actual # 43<br />
Clk Day 133 1 – 31 Set here, Read at actual # 44<br />
Clk Year 134 0 – 99 Set here, Read at actual # 45<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
160 • Parameters List<br />
18. PARAMETERS LIST<br />
Parameter<br />
Default setting<br />
MAIN & PROTECT refer to section 7.8.2 page 55<br />
Range<br />
Range w/dip switch #7=ON<br />
RATED LINE VOLT. 6600 VOLT. 2300-15000 VOLT.<br />
STARTER FLC 150 AMP. 20 – 1800 AMP.<br />
MOTOR FLA 150 AMP. 33-100% of STARTER FLC<br />
RATED MOTOR PWR 1000KW 50-40000KW<br />
SERVICE POWER 100% 100-130%<br />
UNDERCURR. TRIP 0% OF FLA 0 = OFF, 20-90% of FLA<br />
UNDERCURR. DELAY 10 SEC. 1-40 SEC.<br />
O/C – SHEAR PIN 850% OF FLA 100 – 850% OF FLA<br />
O/C DELAY 0.5 SEC. 0.0 - 5 SEC.<br />
OVERLOAD CLASS IEC CLASS 10 IEC CLASS 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30<br />
NEMA CLASS 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30<br />
OVERLOAD PROTECT ENABLE WHILE RUN DISABLE, ENABLE WHILE RUN,<br />
ENABLE<br />
UNBALANCE TRIP 20% OF FLA OFF/10-100% OF FLA<br />
UNBALANCE DELAY 5 SEC. 1-60 SEC.<br />
GND FAULT TRIP 20% OF FLA OFF/ 10-100%<br />
GND FAULT DELAY 5 SEC. 1-60 SEC.<br />
UNDERVOLT. TRIP 70% OF Vn 50-90% OF Vn.<br />
UNDERVOLT. DELAY 5 SEC. 1-10 SEC.<br />
OVERVOLT TRIP 120% OF Vn. OFF/110-125% OF Vn<br />
OVERVOLT DELAY 2 SEC. 1-10 SEC.<br />
START PARAMETERS refer to section 7.8.3 page 60<br />
SOFT START CURVE 1 (STANDARD) 0 (BASIC)= Basic<br />
1 (STANDARD)= Standard Curve<br />
2!! = Pump Control Curve # 1<br />
3!! = Pump Control Curve # 2<br />
4!! = Pump Control Curve # 3<br />
5 (RORQUE) = Torque Control<br />
START TACHO. GAIN<br />
When setting Dip sw. # 2<br />
On for Tacho Mode<br />
Note: Tacho Feedback<br />
functions in its basic form.<br />
Additional curves except<br />
for the basic Linear curve<br />
are optional. Consult the<br />
factory for correct tacho<br />
selection and mechanical<br />
installation.<br />
PULSE LEVEL<br />
0 (MIN. GAIN) 0 (MIN. GAIN)= Minimum gain tacho<br />
control<br />
1!! = Second level Tacho gain<br />
2!! = Third level Tacho gain<br />
3!! = Fourth level Tacho gain<br />
4!! = Fifth level Tacho gain<br />
5!! = Sixth level Tacho gain<br />
70% OF FLA<br />
PULSE TIME 0.0 SEC. 0-10 SEC.<br />
INITIAL VOLTAGE<br />
or INITIAL CURRENT<br />
CURRENT LIMIT<br />
ACC. TIME<br />
MAX. START TIME<br />
30%<br />
or 100%<br />
400% OF FLA<br />
10 SEC.<br />
30 SEC.<br />
70-700% OF FLA.<br />
If PULSE TIME>1sec 400%<br />
70-700% OF FLA. If PULSE<br />
TIME>1sec, with the maximum<br />
limitation of: 440x(FLC/FLA)<br />
10-50% of Vn<br />
or 100-400% of motor FLA<br />
5-80% of Vn<br />
or 100-400% of motor FLA<br />
100-400% of motor FLA.<br />
100-700% of motor FLA. With the<br />
maximum limitation of:<br />
440x(FLC/FLA)<br />
1-30 SEC.<br />
1-90 SEC.<br />
1-30 SEC.<br />
1-250 SEC.<br />
NUMBER OF STARTS 1 1-10, OFF.<br />
STARTS PERIOD 20 MIN. 1-60 MIN.<br />
START INHIBIT 15 MIN. 1-60 MIN.<br />
RUN CONTACT DLY 5 SEC. 0-120 SEC.<br />
TURN BYPASS ON AT * 120% OF FLA 120-300% OF FLA<br />
MIN TIME TO BYPS * 3 SEC. 3-60 SEC.<br />
* Only displays if optional relay PCB is installed and pressing<br />
key for 10 seconds when RUN CONTACT DLY parameters<br />
reaches maximum.<br />
Set 1 Set 2 Set 3 Set 4<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
161 • Parameters List<br />
Parameter<br />
Default setting<br />
Range<br />
Range w/dip switch #7=ON<br />
STOP PARAMETERS refer to section 7.8.4 page 66<br />
SOFT STOP CURVE 1 (STANDARD) 0 (BASIC) = Basic<br />
1 (STANDARD)= Standard Curve<br />
2!! = Pump Control Curve # 1<br />
3!! = Pump Control Curve # 2<br />
Set 1 Set 2 Set 3 Set 4<br />
STOP TACHO. GAIN<br />
When setting Dip sw # 2<br />
On for Tacho Mode,<br />
Note: Tacho Feedback<br />
functions in its basic form.<br />
Additional curves except<br />
for the basic Linear curve<br />
are optional. Consult the<br />
factory for correct tacho<br />
selection and mechanical<br />
installation.<br />
DEC. TIME<br />
4!! = Pump Control Curve # 3<br />
5 (TORQUE) = Torque Control<br />
0 (MIN. GAIN) 0 (MIN. GAIN)= Minimum gain tacho<br />
control<br />
1!! = Second level tacho gain<br />
2!! = Third level tacho gain<br />
3!! = Fourth level tacho gain<br />
4!! = Fifth level tacho gain<br />
5!! = Sixth level tacho gain<br />
0 SEC.<br />
0-30 SEC.<br />
0-90 SEC.<br />
FINAL TORQUE 0 (MIN) 0 (MIN.)– 10 (MAX.)<br />
DUAL ADJUSTMENT refer to section 7.8.5 page 68<br />
PARAMETERS<br />
DA: INIT. VOLT<br />
or DA: INIT. CURRENT<br />
DA: CUR. LIMIT<br />
DA: ACC. TIME<br />
DA: DEC. TIME<br />
30%<br />
or 100%<br />
400% OF FLA<br />
10 SEC.<br />
0 SEC.<br />
10-50% of Vn<br />
or 100-400% of motor FLA<br />
5-80% of Vn<br />
or 100-400% of motor FLA<br />
100-400% of motor FLA.<br />
100-700% of motor FLA. With the<br />
maximum limitation of:<br />
440x(FLC/FLA)<br />
1-30 SEC.<br />
1-90 SEC.<br />
0-30 SEC.<br />
0-90 SEC.<br />
DA: MOTOR FLA 150 AMP 33-100% of STARTER FLC<br />
FAULT PARAMETERS refer to section 7.8.6 page 69<br />
UV & PL AUTO RST NO YES/NO<br />
UNDER CUR. RESET OFF 10-120 MIN. / OFF<br />
BYPASS OPEN TRIP ENABLE ENABLE / DISABLE<br />
TRIP AFTER BYPAS ENABLE ENABLE / DISABLE<br />
BY-PASS AUTO RST NO YES/NO<br />
SET CURVE 0 FLT ENABLE ENABLE / DISABLE<br />
PWR ON & NO STRT ENABLE ENABLE / DISABLE<br />
INSULATION ALARM OFF OFF/ 0.2-20Mohm<br />
INSULATION TRIP OFF OFF/ 0.2-20Mohm<br />
PHASE SEQUENCE POSITIVE POSITIVE/NEGATIVE/IGNORE<br />
I/O PROGRAMMING<br />
PARAMETERS<br />
refer to section 7.8.7 page 71<br />
PROG. INPUT #7 RESET TEST/ RESET/MULTI SOFT STOP<br />
(MULTI SOFT STOP with optional<br />
software only)<br />
PROG. INPUT #8 DUAL ADJUSTMENT DUAL ADJUSTMENT/RESET<br />
FAULT RELAY TYPE FAULT FAULT/FAULT – FAIL SAFE<br />
IMM / # STRT PREAL IMMEDIATE IMMEDIATE/# STRTS PREALRM<br />
RELAY ON DELAY 0 SEC. 0.0-3600 SEC.<br />
RELAY OFF DELAY 0 SEC. 0.0-3600 SEC.<br />
ANALOG OUTPUT RELATIVE CURRENT RELATIVE CURRENT/RELATIVE<br />
POWER<br />
COMM. PARAMETERS<br />
MODBUS<br />
refer to section 7.8.8 page 73<br />
COMM. PROTOCOL MODBUS MODBUS/PROFIBUS<br />
BAUD RATE 9600(MODBUS) 1200/2400/4800/9600<br />
PARITY CHECK EVEN EVEN/ODD/NO<br />
SERIAL LINK NO. OFF OFF/1-247<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
162 • Parameters List<br />
Parameter<br />
Default setting<br />
Range<br />
Range w/dip switch #7=ON<br />
S.LINK PAR. SAVE DISABLE ENABLE/DISABLE<br />
SER. LINK CONTROL DISABLE ENABLE/DISABLE<br />
FRONT COM ADDRES OFF OFF/1-247<br />
COMM. PARAMETERS<br />
PROFIBUS<br />
refer to section 7.8.9 page 73<br />
COMM. PROTOCOL PROFIBUS MODBUS/PROFIBUS<br />
BAUD RATE<br />
AUTO(PROFIBUS)<br />
PROFI.NETWORK ID OFF OFF/1-126<br />
S.LINK PAR. SAVE DISABLE ENABLE/DISABLE<br />
SER. LINK CONTROL DISABLE ENABLE/DISABLE<br />
SER. LINK CONTROL DISABLE ENABLE/DISABLE<br />
FRONT COM ADDRES OFF OFF/1-247<br />
STATISTICAL DATA refer to section 7.8.10 page 74<br />
T SINCE LST STRT<br />
Set 1 Set 2 Set 3 Set 4<br />
LAST STRT PERIOD<br />
LAST START MAX I.<br />
TOTAL RUN TIME<br />
TOTAL # OF START<br />
TOTAL ENERGY<br />
TOTAL R. ENERGY<br />
LAST TRIP<br />
TRIP CURRENT<br />
TOTAL # OF TRIPS<br />
PREVIOUS TRIP -1<br />
PREVIOUS TRIP -2<br />
PREVIOUS TRIP -3<br />
PREVIOUS TRIP -4<br />
PREVIOUS TRIP -5<br />
PREVIOUS TRIP -6<br />
PREVIOUS TRIP -7<br />
PREVIOUS TRIP -8<br />
PREVIOUS TRIP -9<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
163 • General Information:<br />
19. GENERAL INFORMATION:<br />
Supply Voltage .........................Line to Line 2,300V, 3,300V, 4,160V, 6,000V, 6,600V, 6,900V, 11,000V,<br />
13,800V, 15,000V (consult the factory for other voltages) + 10%-15%<br />
P.I.V ratings...............................Not less than 3 times rated voltage<br />
Frequency .................................45 – 65 Hz (with frequency automatically change)<br />
Control Supply...........................110-230V 50/60Hz(to be specified) +10% - 15%<br />
110VDC, 125VDC, 220VDC (to be specified) +10% - 15%<br />
Control inputs & Outputs ...........Either same as Control Supply or by special order 24-230V AC/DC (to be<br />
specified)<br />
Load ..........................................Three phases, three wire, squirrel cage induction motor.<br />
Synchronous motor with asynchronous starting characteristics.<br />
Start-Stop Parameters:<br />
Starter FLC................................Starter Full Load Current according to Selector Guide<br />
Motor FLA..................................Motor Full Load Ampere 33-100% of starter FLC<br />
Pump Control Curves ................6 field selectable curves including torque control curve preventing overpressure<br />
during start and water hammer during stop.<br />
Pulse Start Level and Duration..Adjustable level of pulse, for an adjustable time 0-10 Sec, for starting high<br />
friction loads or holding constant current level.<br />
Initial Voltage.............................10-50% Un (*5-85%)<br />
Initial Current .............................for current ramp<br />
Current Limit..............................100-400% of Motor FLA (*100-700%)<br />
Acceleration Time......................1-30 Sec (*1-90 sec)<br />
Deceleration Time .....................0-30 Sec (*0-90 sec)<br />
Dual Adjustments ......................Secondary start stop characteristic for: Motor FLA, Initial Voltage, Current<br />
Limit, Acceleration Time and Deceleration Time.<br />
Tacho and Linear Acceleration..12 field selectable curves – defining Tacho Feedback gain improving linearity.<br />
Motor Protection:<br />
Too many starts.........................Maximum number of starts range Off or 1-10, during a time period 1-60 min.<br />
Starts inhibit...............................Time period 1-60 min, where starting is prevented, after too many starts fault.<br />
Long start time (Stall protection)Maximum allowable starting time 1-30 sec. (*1-250 Sec).<br />
Over current (Shear-pin)............Two operation functions: during starting trips the starter at 850% and during<br />
running at 100-850% In, both within 1 Cycle.<br />
Electronic overload……………..According to IEC class 5, 10, 15, 20, 25 or 30 OR according to NEMA class 5,<br />
10, 15, 20, 25 or 30.<br />
Under current ............................Trips when current drops below 20-90% In with time delay of 1-40 sec.<br />
Under voltage** .........................Trips when main voltage drops below 50-90% of Un. Time delay 1-10 Sec<br />
Over voltage ..............................Trips when main voltage increases above 110-125% of Un.<br />
Time delay of 1-10 sec.<br />
Phase loss.................................Trips when one or two phases are missing.<br />
Phase sequence****. .................Trips when phase sequence is wrong.<br />
Wrong connection & Shorted SCR…<br />
Prevents starting, trips if motor is not connected / incorrectly connected to the<br />
starter or in case one or more SCRs have been shorted.<br />
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
164 • General Information:<br />
Heat-sink over temp. .................Trips when heat-sink temperature rises above 85˚C.<br />
External fault 1 ..........................Trips when an external contact closes for 2 sec.<br />
External fault 2 ..........................Trips when an external contact closes for 2 sec.<br />
Unbalance Current. ...................Trips when Current Unbalance exceeds preset value for more than<br />
“Unbalance delay”<br />
Ground Fault Current.................Trips when Ground Fault Current exceeds preset level for more than “Gnd<br />
Fault Delay”<br />
Power ON & No Start****...........Trips when three phases voltage is connected to the soft-starter input and<br />
start signal was not issued for more than 30 seconds.<br />
By-Pass Open ****.....................Trips if the Bypass Contactor and one or two if its phases did not close.<br />
* Special settings, extended range<br />
** With optional Auto Reset<br />
*** Future enhancement<br />
**** Can be disable<br />
Control:<br />
Displays.....................................LCD in 4 – Field selectable languages and 8 LEDs<br />
Keypad ......................................6 keys for easy setting<br />
Aux. Contact – Immediate .........1 C/O, 8A, 250VAC, 2000VA<br />
Aux. Contact – End of Acceleration..1 C/O, 8A, 250VAC, 2000VA<br />
Fault Contact .............................1 C/O, 8A, 250VAC, 2000VA<br />
Communication .........................RS 485 with MODBUS or PROFIBUS protocols<br />
Temperatures...........................Operating -10˚ to 50˚C<br />
Storage -20˚ to 70˚C<br />
Enclosure:<br />
Degree of Protection..................IP 00 - Chassis type<br />
IP 32 - Standard<br />
IP 54 – Optional<br />
Paint ..........................................RAL 7032 – standard<br />
Other colors - optional<br />
Normal Service Conditions:<br />
Altitude ......................................Should not exceed 1000m.<br />
Consult the factory for equipment to be used at higher altitudes.<br />
Humidity ....................................95% Non condensed<br />
Starter Consumption Ratings (for IP00 OEM Kit)<br />
Peak consumption.....................350VA during start process and less than 20 VA otherwise<br />
Solcon Industries Ltd.<br />
www.solcon.com; Technical support: office@solcon.com<br />
_____________________________________________________________________________________________